Panduan Penggunaan 65OLED873

Transkripsi

1 Register your product and get support at OLED873 series Panduan Penggunaan 65OLED873

2 Daftar isi 1 Mengonfigurasi 10 Menu TV 1.1 Membaca Petunjuk Keselamatan Dudukan TV dan Braket Pemasangan di Dinding Tips tentang Penempatan 1.4 Kabel Daya Kabel Antena Ikhtisar tombol 2.2 Ikhtisar tombol 2.3 Sensor IR Baterai Baterai Membersihkan 11 Sumber 4 Saluran Jaringan 12.2 Bluetooth Pemasangan Satelit Pemasangan Antena/Kabel 5.3 Salinan Daftar Saluran Salinan Daftar Satelit Dari Sambungan USB 61 Memutar Video Anda 61 Melihat Foto Anda 62 Memutar Musik Anda Panduan TV Apa yang Anda Perlukan Data Panduan TV Menggunakan Panduan TV Perekaman dan Menjeda TV 16.1 Merekam Menjeda TV Smartphone dan Tablet Aplikasi Remote TV Philips 17.2 Google Cast AirPlay MHL Permainan Apa yang Anda Perlukan 18.2 Gamepad Bermain Permainan Ambilight Gaya Ambilight Ambilight Nonaktif Pengaturan Ambilight Pilihan Teratas Tentang Pilihan Teratas 20.2 Sekarang di TV TV on Demand Video on Demand Freeview Play Memulai Internet Menyambungkan TV Android Anda 35 9 Internet Dari Komputer atau NAS Menu Favorit Menu Paling Populer dan Menu Terakhir Diputar 6.1 Tentang Sambungan CAM dengan Kartu Pintar - CI Sistem Home Theatre - HTS Smartphone dan Tablet Pemutar Disk Blu-ray Pemutar DVD Bluetooth Headphone Konsol Permainan Hard Drive USB Keyboard USB Flash Drive USB Kamera Foto Camcorder HDMI Komputer Tentang Aplikasi Google Play Galeri Aplikasi Memulai atau Menghentikan Aplikasi 8.5 Mengunci Aplikasi Mengelola Aplikasi Penyimpanan Video, Foto dan Musik 20 6 Menyambungkan Perangkat Gambar Suara Pengaturan Ambilight Pengaturan Ekonomis Pengaturan Umum Pengaturan Jam, Wilayah, dan Bahasa 13.7 Pengaturan Android Pengaturan Akses Universal Pengaturan Kunci Penginstalan Saluran Pengaturan Menonton saluran Saluran Favorit Teks/Teleteks TV Interaktif 15 8 Aplikasi Jaringan 7.1 Jaringan dan Internet 7.2 Akun Google Galeri Aplikasi Philips Beralih ke perangkat Opsi untuk Input TV Nama dan Jenis Perangkat 11.4 Memindai Ulang Sambungan 6 3 Menyalakan dan Mematikan 3.1 Aktif atau siaga 3.2 Tombol di TV Tentang Menu TV 10.2 Membuka Menu TV 4 2 Remote Control Opsi tentang Internet

3 21 Menu Awal Tentang Menu Awal 21.2 Membuka menu Awal 21.3 Profil Terbatas Netflix Perangkat lunak Perbarui Perangkat Lunak Versi Perangkat Lunak Pembaruan Perangkat Lunak Otomatis 23.4 Perangkat Lunak Sumber Terbuka Lisensi Sumber Terbuka Pengumuman Spesifikasi Lingkungan Daya Sistem Operasi Penerimaan Tipe Layar Resolusi Input Layar 24.7 Konektivitas Suara Multimedia bantuan dan Dukungan Mendaftarkan TV Anda Menggunakan Bantuan Penyelesaian Masalah Bantuan online Dukungan dan Perbaikan Keselamatan dan Perawatan Keselamatan Perawatan Layar Ketentuan Penggunaan Ketentuan Penggunaan - TV Ketentuan Penggunaan - Smart TV Ketentuan Penggunaan - Galeri Aplikasi Philips Hak Cipta MHL Ultra HD HDMI Dolby Audio DTS Premium Sound 28.6 DTS 2.0+Digital Out 28.7 Microsoft Wi-Fi Alliance Kensington Merek Dagang Lainnya Penafian menyangkut layanan dan/atau perangkat lunak yang ditawarkan oleh pihak ketiga 180 Indeks 181 3

4 1 kira sedalam 10 mm di bush berulir TV. Mengonfigurasi Perhatian Pemasangan TV di dinding memerlukan keahlian khusus dan hanya boleh dilakukan oleh personel berkualifikasi. Pemasangan TV di dinding harus memenuhi standar keselamatan agar sesuai dengan berat TV. Selain itu, baca juga tindakan keselamatan sebelum mengatur posisi TV. TP Vision Europe B.V. menyatakan tidak bertanggung jawab atas pemasangan yang tidak tepat atau pemasangan yang mengakibatkan kecelakaan atau cedera. 1.1 Membaca Petunjuk Keselamatan Baca petunjuk keselamatan terlebih dahulu sebelum menggunakan TV. Untuk membaca petunjuk, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Petunjuk Keselamatan. 1.3 Tips tentang Penempatan 1.2 Dudukan TV dan Braket Pemasangan di Dinding Atur posisi TV sedemikian rupa sehingga cahaya lampu tidak menyorot langsung ke layar. Redupkan pencahayaan di dalam ruangan untuk efek Ambilight yang terbaik. Atur posisi jarak TV hingga sejauh 15 cm dari dinding. Jarak ideal untuk menonton TV 3 kali ukuran layarnya secara diagonal. Saat duduk, mata Anda harus sejajar dengan bagian tengah layar. Dudukan TV Anda dapat menemukan petunjuk pemasangan dudukan TV di Panduan Ringkas yang disertakan dengan TV. Jika panduan ini hilang, Anda dapat mengunduhnya dari Gunakan nomor jenis produk TV untuk mencari Panduan Ringkas yang akan diunduh. Pemasangan di Dinding TV Anda juga dipersiapkan dengan braket pemasangan di dinding yang sesuai VESA (dijual terpisah). Gunakan kode VESA berikut ini saat membeli braket pemasangan di dinding Kabel Daya Masukkan kabel daya ke konektor POWER di bagian belakang TV. Pastikan kabel daya dicolokkan dengan rapat ke konektor. Pastikan steker daya, di soket dinding, selalu dapat diakses. Jika Anda mencabut kabel daya, tarik stekernya, jangan kabelnya. 65OLED873 VESA MIS-F 300x300, M6 (min.: 10 mm, maks.:14mm) Persiapan Lepaskan 4 tutup sekrup plastik terlebih dahulu dari bush berulir di bagian belakang TV. Pastikan sekrup logam yang digunakan untuk memasang TV ke braket yang sesuai VESA masuk kira- Meskipun konsumsi daya TV ini sangat rendah pada saat siaga, cabut kabel daya untuk menghemat energi 4

5 jika TV tidak digunakan dalam jangka waktu panjang. Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Mengaktifkan untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang menyalakan atau mematikan TV. 1.5 Kabel Antena Colokkan steker antena dengan kuat ke soket Antena di bagian belakang TV. Anda dapat menyambungkan antena Anda sendiri atau sinyal antena dari sistem distribusi antena. Gunakan konektor antena RF IEC Koaks 75 Ohm. Gunakan sambungan antena ini untuk mendapatkan sinyal input DVB-T dan DVB-C. 5

6 2 Tengah Remote Control 2.1 Ikhtisar tombol Bagian Atas 1 - Tombol OK Untuk mengonfirmasi pilihan atau pengaturan. 2 - Tombol Panah / navigasi Untuk berpindah ke atas, ke bawah, ke kiri atau ke kanan. 3 - BACK Untuk beralih kembali ke saluran sebelumnya yang Anda pilih. Untuk kembali ke menu sebelumnya. Untuk kembali ke halaman Apl/Internet sebelumnya. 1 - Siaga / Aktif Untuk menghidupkan TV atau kembali ke Siaga. 2 - AMBILIGHT Untuk memilih salah satu gaya Ambilight. 4 - OPTIONS Untuk membuka atau menutup menu Opsi. 3 - TOP PICKS Untuk membuka menu dengan program yang disarankan, Video on Demand (Video Rental) atau TV Online (Catch Up TV). Jika tersedia. 5 - HOME Untuk membuka menu Awal. Bagian Bawah 4 - TV GUIDE Untuk membuka atau menutup Panduan TV. 5 - SOURCES Untuk membuka atau menutup menu Sumber. 6 - SETTINGS Untuk Membuka Pengaturan Sering. 7 - EXIT Untuk beralih kembali ke menonton TV. Untuk meninggalkan aplikasi TV interaktif. 8 - SEARCH Untuk membuka halaman pencarian. 9 - LIST Untuk membuka atau menutup daftar saluran. 10 Menu TV Untuk membuka Menu TV dengan fungsi TV biasa. 1 - Tombol berwarna Pemilihan opsi langsung. 2 - Volume Untuk menyesuaikan tingkat volume. 3 - Tombol Angka Untuk memilih saluran secara langsung. 46 SUBTITLE

7 Untuk mengalihkan Terjemahan ke aktif, tidak aktif, atau aktif saat diam. 5 - Pemutaran dan Rekam Putar, untuk melakukan pemutaran. Jeda, untuk menjeda pemutaran Hentikan, untuk menghentikan pemutaran Putar mundur, untuk memutar mundur Putar maju cepat, untuk memutar maju cepat Rekam, untuk memulai perekaman 6- Untuk membuka Aplikasi Netflix secara langsung. Dengan TV dinyalakan atau dalam status siaga. 7 - Saluran Untuk beralih ke saluran berikutnya atau sebelumnya dalam daftar saluran. Untuk membuka halaman berikutnya atau sebelumnya di Teks/Teleteks. Untuk memulai bab berikutnya atau sebelumnya di disk. 8 - Diam Untuk menonaktifkan atau mengaktifkan suara lagi. 9 - TEXT Untuk membuka atau menutup Teks/Teleteks. 2.2 Ikhtisar tombol Ikhtisar tombol 1 - Siaga / Aktif Untuk menghidupkan TV atau kembali ke Siaga. 2 - VOICE Untuk memulai pencarian suara. 3 - Panah / navigasi Untuk berpindah ke atas, ke bawah, ke kiri atau ke kanan. 4 - OK Untuk mengonfirmasi pilihan atau pengaturan. 5 - BACK Untuk kembali ke saluran sebelumnya yang Anda pilih. Untuk kembali ke menu sebelumnya. 6 - HOME Untuk membuka menu Awal. 7 - Volume Untuk menyesuaikan tingkat volume. Fungsi lain Opsi Tekan terus OK untuk membuka menu opsi. 7

8 (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Android > Preferensi > Ucapan Diam Tekan terus "-" (Volume turun) untuk menonaktifkan suara. Pengaturan 2.3 Menu TV Tekan terus Awal untuk membuka menu TV dengan fungsi TV biasa. Sensor IR Namun, TV juga bisa menerima perintah dari remote control yang menggunakan IR (inframerah) untuk mengirimkan perintah. Jika Anda menggunakan remote control tersebut, selalu pastikan Anda mengarahkan remote control ke sensor inframerah di bagian depan TV. Beralih saluran Usap ke atas/bawah dalam mode "Tonton TV" untuk mengganti saluran. Peringatan Memasangkan dengan TV Anda. Jangan meletakkan benda apa pun di depan sensor IR pada TV, karena sinyal IR dapat terhalang. Anda cukup mengarahkan remote control ke TV, lalu tekan dan tahan tombol HOME dan BACK sampai LED Biru remote control mulai berkedip (sekitar 3 detik kemudian), lalu lepaskan tombol HOME dan BACK. 2.4 Baterai Proses pemasangan disarankan agar dimulai setelah TV benar-benar aktif (peluncur Android sudah benarbenar termuat). Jika TV tidak bereaksi saat tombol remote control ditekan, daya baterai mungkin kosong. Untuk mengganti baterai, buka wadah baterai pada sisi depan bawah remote control. Selalu dekatkan remote control dengan TV (dalam jarak 1 m) selama pemasangan. 1 - Geser pintu baterai ke arah yang ditunjukkan oleh anak panah. 2 - Ganti baterai lama dengan 2 baterai jenis AAA-R03-1.5V. Pastikan ujung dan baterai terpasang dengan benar. 3 - Atur ulang posisi pintu baterai dan geser kembali hingga berbunyi klik. Atau, buka (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Remote control > Pasangkan remote control, lalu ikuti instruksi pada layar. Sebuah pesan akan muncul jika pemasangan berhasil. Pencarian suara Anda dapat mencari video, musik, atau apa pun di Internet cukup dengan suara Anda. Anda bisa mengucapkan perintah ke mikrofon pada remote control. Anda harus memasangkan remote control ke TV sebelum menggunakan pencarian suara. Keluarkan baterai jika Anda tidak menggunakan remote kontrol dalam waktu lama. Buang baterai lama Anda secara aman sesuai dengan petunjuk akhir penggunaan. Untuk menggunakan Suara Tekan VOICE pada remote control, lampu biru di remote control menyala dan bidang pencarian terbuka, mikrofon aktif. 2 - Ucapkan yang Anda cari dengan jelas. Anda dapat mengucapkan perintah selama 10 detik sebelum mikrofon mati. Mungkin perlu beberapa waktu agar hasilnya keluar. 3 - Di daftar hasil pencarian, Anda dapat memilih item yang Anda inginkan. Mengatur bahasa yang ingin Anda gunakan dengan Untuk informasi selengkapnya, di Bantuan, pilih Kata kunci, dan cari Akhir penggunaan. interaksi suara 8

9 2.5 Baterai Jika TV tidak bereaksi saat tombol remote control ditekan, daya baterai mungkin kosong. Untuk mengganti baterai, buka wadah baterai pada sisi depan bawah remote control. 1 - Geser pintu baterai ke arah yang ditunjukkan oleh anak panah. 2 - Ganti baterai lama dengan 2 baterai jenis Alkaline AA-LR6-1.5V. Pastikan ujung dan baterai terpasang dengan benar. 3 - Atur ulang posisi pintu baterai dan geser kembali hingga berbunyi klik. Keluarkan baterai jika Anda tidak menggunakan remote kontrol dalam waktu lama. Buang baterai lama Anda secara aman sesuai dengan petunjuk akhir penggunaan. Untuk informasi selengkapnya, di Bantuan, pilih Kata kunci, dan cari Akhir penggunaan. 2.6 Membersihkan Remote kontrol Anda memiliki lapisan tahan goresan. Untuk membersihkan remote control, gunakan kain lembap yang halus. Jangan pernah gunakan bahan seperti alkohol, bahan kimia atau pembersih rumah tangga pada remote control. 9

10 3 3.2 Menyalakan dan Mematikan Tombol di TV 3.1 Untuk membuka menu dasar Jika remote control Anda hilang atau baterainya kosong, Anda masih dapat melakukan beberapa pengoperasian TV dasar. Aktif atau siaga 1 - Dengan TV yang dinyalakan, tekan tombol joystick di bagian TV untuk menampilkan menu dasar. 2 - Tekan kiri atau kanan untuk memilih Volume, Saluran atau Sumber. Pilih Demo, untuk memulai film demo. 3 - Tekan naik atau turun untuk menyesuaikan volume atau mencari saluran berikutnya atau sebelumnya. Tekan naik atau turun untuk melewati daftar sumber, termasuk pemilihan tuner. Tekan tombol joystick untuk memulai film demo. 4 - Menu akan otomatis menghilang. Pastikan TV tersambung ke kabel AC utama. Sambungkan kabel daya yang disertakan ke konektor AC in di bagian belakang TV. Lampu indikator di bagian bawah TV akan menyala. Mengaktifkan Tekan di remote control untuk menyalakan TV. Alternatifnya, tekan HOME. Anda juga dapat menekan tombol joystick kecil di bagian belakang TV untuk menyalakan TV jika Anda tidak dapat menemukan remote control atau baterainya habis. Untuk menyalakan TV dalam mode siaga, pilih dan tekan tombol joystick. Beralih ke siaga Untuk mengalihkan TV ke siaga, tekan di remote control. Anda juga dapat menekan tombol joystick kecil di bagian belakang TV. Dalam mode siaga, TV masih tersambung ke daya listrik tetapi mengonsumsi energi yang sangat sedikit. Untuk mematikan TV sepenuhnya, cabut steker daya. Saat mencabut steker daya, selalu tarik steker daya tersebut, jangan kabelnya. Pastikan Anda selalu memiliki akses sepenuhnya terhadap steker, kabel, dan stopkontak. 10

11 4 - Tekan OPTIONS dan pilih Buka Kunci Saluran dan 5 - Masukkan kode PIN 4 digit jika TV Anda meminta begitu. 6 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. 4 Saluran 4.1 Menonton saluran Jika Anda mengunci atau membuka kunci saluran di daftar saluran, Anda hanya perlu memasukkan kode PIN cukup sekali sampai Anda menutup daftar saluran. Mencari Suatu Saluran Untuk mulai menonton saluran TV, tekan. TV akan mencari saluran yang terakhir Anda tonton. Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Penguncian Anak untuk informasi selengkapnya. Beralih Saluran Untuk beralih saluran, tekan atau. Jika Anda tahu nomor salurannya, ketik nomornya dengan tombol angka. Tekan OK setelah Anda memasukkan angka untuk langsung beralih. Peringkat Orang Tua Agar anak-anak tidak menonton program yang tidak sesuai dengan usia mereka, Anda dapat mengatur peringkat usia. Jika informasi tersedia dari Internet, TV akan menampilkan nama dan detail program saat ini yang diikuti dengan nama dan detail program berikutnya. Program saluran digital bisa diberi peringkat usia. Jika peringkat usia program setara atau lebih tinggi daripada usia yang telah Anda atur sebagai peringkat usia untuk anak Anda, program akan dikunci. Untuk menonton program yang dikunci, Anda harus memasukkan kode Peringkat org tua terlebih dahulu. Saluran sebelumnya Untuk beralih kembali ke saluran yang sebelumnya dicari, tekan BACK. Anda juga dapat beralih ke saluran dari Daftar Saluran. Untuk mengatur peringkat usia 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Penguncian Anak > Peringkat Org Tua dan 3 - Masukkan kode penguncian Anak 4-angka. Jika Anda belum mengatur kodenya, pilih Atur Kode di Penguncian anak. Sekarang masukkan kode penguncian Anak 4-angka dan konfirmasi. Sekarang Anda bisa mengatur peringkat usia. 4 - Kembali ke Penguncian Orang Tua, pilih usia dan 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Mengunci Saluran Mengunci dan Membuka Kunci Saluran Agar anak-anak tidak menonton saluran tertentu, Anda bisa mengunci saluran. Untuk menonton saluran yang dikunci, Anda harus terlebih dahulu memasukkan kode PIN Penguncian Anak 4 digit. Anda tidak bisa mengunci program dari perangkat yang tersambung. Untuk mengunci saluran 1 - Tekan. 2 - Tekan OK untuk membuka daftar saluran. Jika perlu, ganti daftar saluran. 3 - Pilih saluran yang ingin Anda kunci. 4 - Tekan OPTIONS dan pilih Kunci Saluran dan 5 - Masukkan kode PIN 4 digit jika TV Anda meminta begitu. Saluran yang dikunci akan ditandai dengan (gembok). 6 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Untuk menonaktifkan peringkat usia orang tua, pilih Tidak Ada. Namun, di beberapa negara Anda harus mengatur peringkat usia. Untuk beberapa stasiun penyiaran/operator, TV hanya akan mengunci program dengan peringkat yang lebih tinggi. Peringkat usia orang tua diatur untuk semua saluran. Untuk membuka kunci saluran 1 - Tekan. 2 - Tekan OK untuk membuka daftar saluran. Jika perlu, ganti daftar saluran. 3 - Pilih saluran yang ingin Anda buka kuncinya. 11

12 Opsi Saluran Bahasa Terjemahan Buka Opsi Bahasa Terjemahan yang Lebih Dipilih Saat menonton saluran, Anda bisa mengatur beberapa opsi. Siaran digital dapat menawarkan beberapa bahasa terjemahan untuk sebuah program. Anda dapat menetapkan bahasa terjemahan primer dan sekunder pilihan Anda. Jika terjemahan di salah satu bahasa ini tersedia, TV akan menampilkan terjemahan yang Anda pilih. Anda dapat memilih beberapa opsi, bergantung pada jenis saluran yang Anda tonton (analog atau digital) atau bergantung pada pengaturan TV yang Anda buat. Untuk menetapkan bahasa terjemahan primer dan sekunder Untuk membuka menu opsi 1 - Saat menonton saluran, tekan OPTIONS. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS lagi untuk menutup. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Wilayah dan Bahasa > Bahasa > Terjemahan Primer atau Terjemahan Sekunder. 3 - Pilih bahasa yang Anda perlukan dan 4 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Terjemahan Mengaktifkan Stasiun penyiaran digital dapat dilengkapi terjemahan untuk programnya. Memilih Bahasa Terjemahan Untuk menampilkan terjemahan Jika bahasa terjemahan yang diinginkan tidak tersedia, Anda dapat memilih bahasa terjemahan lain apabila tersedia. Jika bahasa terjemahan tidak tersedia, Anda tidak dapat memilih opsi ini. Tekan SUBTITLE. Anda dapat mengalihkan terjemahan ke On atau Off. Alternatifnya, Anda dapat memilih Otomatis. Untuk memilih bahasa terjemahan saat tidak ada bahasa pilihan Anda yang tersedia Otomatis Jika informasi bahasa adalah bagian dari siaran digital dan program yang disiarkan tidak diatur dalam bahasa Anda (bahasa yang diatur di TV), TV dapat menampilkan terjemahan secara otomatis dalam salah satu bahasa terjemahan yang dipilih. Salah satu bahasa terjemahan ini harus juga menjadi bagian dari siaran. 1 - Tekan OPTIONS. 2 - Pilih Bahasa Terjemahan dan pilih salah satu bahasa sebagai bahasa terjemahan untuk sementara waktu. Bahasa Audio Anda dapat memilih bahasa terjemahan pilihan di Bahasa Terjemahan. Bahasa Audio yang Dipilih Siaran digital dapat menawarkan beberapa bahasa audio (bahasa lisan) untuk suatu program. Anda dapat menetapkan bahasa audio primer dan sekunder yang Anda pilih. Jika audio pada salah satu bahasa ini tersedia, TV akan beralih ke bahasa audio tersebut. Terjemahan dari Teks Jika Anda menyetel saluran analog, Anda harus menyediakan terjemahan untuk tiap saluran secara manual. 1 - Beralihlah ke satu saluran dan tekan TEXT untuk membuka Teks. 2 - Masukkan nomor halaman untuk terjemahan, biasanya Tekan TEXT lagi untuk menutup Teks. Untuk menetapkan bahasa audio primer dan sekunder 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Wilayah dan Bahasa dan pilih Bahasa > Audio Primer atau Audio Sekunder. 3 - Pilih bahasa yang Anda perlukan dan 4 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Jika Anda memilih Aktif di menu Terjemahan saat menonton saluran analog ini, terjemahan akan ditampilkan jika tersedia. Untuk mengetahui apakah saluran itu analog atau digital, beralihlah ke saluran tersebut dan buka Informasi di OPTIONS. 12

13 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Ubah Urutan Saluran dan 3 - Di Daftar Favorit, pilih saluran yang ingin Anda ubah urutannya dan 4 - Dengan tombol (naik) atau (turun) pindahkan saluran ke tempat yang Anda inginkan. 5 - Tekan OK untuk mengonfirmasi lokasi baru. 6 - Anda dapat mengubah urutan saluran dengan metode yang sama sampai Anda menutup Daftar Favorit dengan tombol BACK. Memilih Bahasa Audio Jika bahasa audio yang diinginkan tidak tersedia, Anda dapat memilih bahasa audio lain apabila tersedia. Jika bahasa audio tidak tersedia, tidak dapat memilih opsi ini. Untuk memilih bahasa audio saat tidak ada bahasa pilihan Anda yang tersedia 1 - Tekan OPTIONS. 2 - Pilih Bahasa Audio dan pilih salah satu bahasa sebagai bahasa audio untuk sementara waktu. 4.2 Saluran Favorit HbbTV pada Saluran ini Tentang Saluran Favorit Jika Anda ingin menghindari akses ke halaman HbbTV pada saluran tertentu, Anda dapat memblokir halaman HbbTV untuk saluran ini saja. Dalam daftar saluran favorit, Anda dapat mengumpulkan saluran yang Anda inginkan. Mengaktifkan HbbTV Anda dapat membuat 4 daftar saluran favorit yang berbeda untuk berpindah saluran dengan mudah. Anda dapat menamai masing-masing Daftar Favorit secara berbeda. Hanya di Daftar Favorit yang salurannya bisa Anda urutkan ulang. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Lanjutan > Pengaturan HbbTV > HbbTV > Aktif. Dengan Daftar Favorit dipilih, tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk memilih saluran, lalu tekan OK untuk menonton saluran yang dipilih. Anda hanya bisa menonton saluran yang ada di dalam daftar tersebut jika menggunakan tombol atau. Informasi Anda dapat melihat karakteristik teknis dari saluran tertentu, seperti digital atau analog, jenis suara, dll. Untuk melihat informasi teknis pada suatu saluran 1 - Cari saluran. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Informasi dan 3 - Untuk menutup layar ini, Membuat Daftar Favorit Untuk membuat daftar saluran favorit 1 - Tekan, beralih ke TV. 2 - Tekan OK untuk membuka daftar saluran yang saat ini aktif. 3 - Tekan OPTIONS. 4 - Pilih Buat Daftar Favorit dan 5 - Di daftar pada sebelah kiri, pilih saluran yang Anda inginkan sebagai favorit dan Saluran tercantum di daftar di sebelah kanan sesuai urutan penambahannya. Untuk mengurungkannya, pilih saluran di daftar di sebelah kiri dan tekan OK lagi. 6 - Jika perlu, Anda bisa melanjutkan pemilihan dan penambahan saluran sebagai favorit. 7 - Untuk menyelesaikan penambahan saluran, tekan BACK. Mono / Stereo Anda dapat mengalihkan suara saluran analog ke Mono atau Stereo. Untuk beralih ke Mono atau Stereo 1 - Cari saluran analog. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Mono/Stereo dan tekan (kanan). 3 - Pilih Mono atau Stereo dan 4 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Mengubah Urutan Saluran TV akan meminta penggantian nama Daftar Favorit. Anda dapat menggunakan keyboard pada layar. Hanya di Daftar Favorit Anda dapat mengubah urutan saluran (ubah susunan). Untuk mengubah urutan saluran 1 - Gunakan keyboard pada layar untuk menghapus nama saat ini dan memasukkan nama baru. 2 - Jika selesai, pilih Tutup dan 1 - Buka Daftar Favorit yang ingin Anda ubah urutannya. TV akan beralih ke Daftar Favorit yang baru dibuat tersebut. 13

14 Anda dapat menambahkan serangkaian saluran dalam sekali jalan atau memulai Daftar Favorit dengan menggandakan suatu daftar saluran dengan semua salurannya dan menghapus saluran yang tidak Anda inginkan. Mengubah Urutan Saluran Hanya di Daftar Favorit Anda dapat mengubah urutan saluran (ubah susunan). Untuk mengubah urutan saluran Saluran di Daftar Favorit dinomori ulang. 1 - Buka Daftar Favorit yang ingin Anda ubah urutannya. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Ubah Urutan Saluran dan 3 - Di Daftar Favorit, pilih saluran yang ingin Anda ubah urutannya dan 4 - Dengan tombol (naik) atau (turun) pindahkan saluran ke tempat yang Anda inginkan. 5 - Tekan OK untuk mengonfirmasi lokasi baru. 6 - Anda dapat mengubah urutan saluran dengan metode yang sama sampai Anda menutup Daftar Favorit dengan tombol BACK. Menambahkan Rentang Saluran Untuk menambahkan rentang saluran yang berurutan ke Daftar Favorit dalam sekali jalan, Anda dapat menggunakan Pilih Rentang. Untuk menambahkan rentang saluran 1 - Buka Daftar Favorit di tempat Anda ingin menambahkan rentang saluran. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Pilih Rentang dan 3 - Di daftar di sebelah kiri pilih saluran pertama pada rentang yang ingin Anda tambahkan dan 4 - Tekan (turun) untuk memilih saluran terakhir dari rentang yang ingin Anda tambahkan. Saluran ditandai di sebelah kiri. 5 - Tekan OK untuk menambahkan rentang saluran ini dan konfirmasi. 4.3 Teks/Teleteks Halaman Teks Untuk membuka Teks/Teleteks, tekan TEXT, saat Anda menonton saluran TV. Untuk menutup Teks, tekan TEXT lagi. Anda juga dapat mulai membuat Daftar Favorit dari Pilih Rentang. Memilih halaman Teks Untuk memilih halaman... Mengganti Nama Daftar Favorit 1 - Masukkan nomor halaman dengan tombol angka. 2 - Gunakan tombol panah untuk menavigasi. 3 - Tekan tombol warna untuk memilih subjek berkode warna di bagian bawah layar. Anda hanya dapat mengubah nama Daftar Favorit. Untuk mengubah nama Daftar Favorit Subhalaman teks 1 - Buka Daftar Favorit yang namanya ingin Anda ubah. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Ubah Nama Daftar Favorit dan 3 - Gunakan keyboard pada layar untuk menghapus nama saat ini dan memasukkan nama baru. 4 - Jika selesai, pilih Tutup dan 5 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup daftar saluran. Nomor halaman teks dapat menyimpan beberapa subhalaman. Nomor subhalaman ditampilkan pada panel di sebelah nomor halaman utama. Untuk memilih subhalaman, tekan atau. Ikhtisar. Halaman teks Beberapa stasiun penyiaran menawarkan Teks T.O.P Untuk membuka halaman Teks Halaman teks di dalam Teks, tekan OPTIONS dan pilih Ikhtisar T.O.P.. Menghapus Daftar Favorit Halaman favorit Anda hanya dapat menghapus Daftar Favorit. TV membuat daftar 10 halaman Teks terakhir yang Anda buka. Anda dapat dengan mudah membuka kembali halaman tersebut di kolom halaman Teks Favorit. Untuk menghapus Daftar Favorit 1 - Buka Daftar Favorit yang ingin Anda hapus. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Hapus Daftar Favorit dan 3 - Konfirmasi untuk menghapus daftar tersebut. 4 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup daftar saluran. 1 - Dalam Teks, pilih (hati) di sudut kiri atas layar untuk menampilkan kolom halaman favorit. 2 - Tekan (turun) atau (naik) untuk memilih nomor halaman dan tekan OK untuk membuka halaman. 14

15 Anda dapat menghapus daftar dengan opsi Hapus Halaman Favorit. halaman favorit. Hapus Halaman Favorit Untuk menghapus daftar halaman favorit. Bahasa Untuk mengalihkan grup karakter yang digunakan Teks untuk ditampilkan dengan benar. Teks 2,5 Untuk mengaktifkan Teks 2,5 agar warna lebih banyak dan grafik lebih baik. Mencari Teks Anda dapat memilih sebuah kata dan memindai Teks untuk semua kemunculan kata ini. 1 - Buka halaman Teks dan 2 - Pilih kata atau angka menggunakan tanda panah. 3 - Tekan OK lagi untuk langsung melompat ke kemunculan berikutnya dari kata atau angka ini. 4 - Tekan OK lagi untuk melompat ke kemunculan berikutnya. 5 - Untuk menghentikan pencarian, tekan (naik) hingga tidak ada yang dipilih. Konfigurasi Teks Bahasa teks Teks dari perangkat yang tersambung Beberapa stasiun penyiaran TV digital menyediakan beberapa bahasa Teks. Untuk mengatur bahasa Teks primer dan sekunder Anda... Beberapa perangkat yang menerima saluran TV juga dapat menghadirkan Teks. Untuk membuka Teks dari perangkat yang tersambung Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Wilayah dan Bahasa dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Bahasa > Teks Primer atau Teks Sekunder dan 4 - Pilih bahasa Teks yang Anda inginkan. 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih perangkat dan 2 - Saat menonton saluran di perangkat, tekan OPTIONS, pilih Tampilkan tombol perangkat dan pilih tombol dan 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menyembunyikan tombol perangkat. 4 - Untuk menutup Teks, tekan BACK lagi. Teks Digital (Inggris saja) Teks 2,5 Beberapa stasiun penyiaran digital menawarkan Teks Digital khusus atau TV interaktif di saluran TV digitalnya. Hal ini mencakup Teks normal yang menggunakan tombol angka, warna dan panah untuk memilih dan menavigasi. Jika tersedia, Teks 2,5 menawarkan lebih banyak warna dan grafis yang lebih baik. Teks 2,5 diaktifkan sebagai pengaturan pabrik standar. Untuk menonaktifkan Teks 2,5 1 - Tekan TEXT. 2 - Saat Teks/Teleteks terbuka di layar, tekan OPTIONS. 3 - Pilih Teks 2,5 > Tidak aktif dan 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Untuk menutup Teks Digital, tekan BACK. Opsi Teks Pada Teks/Teleteks, tekan OPTIONS untuk memilih berikut ini 4.4 Bekukan halaman Untuk menghentikan rotasi otomatis subhalaman. Dua layar/layar penuh Untuk menampilkan saluran TV dan Teks saling bersebelahan. Ikhtisar T.O.P. Untuk membuka halaman Teks T.O.P Perbesar Untuk memperbesar halaman Teks agar nyaman dibaca. Tampilkan Untuk memperlihatkan informasi yang tersembunyi di halaman. Gulir subhalaman Untuk menggulir subhalaman saat tersedia. Menyembunyikan/Menampilkan Halaman Favorit Untuk menyembunyikan atau menampilkan daftar TV Interaktif Tentang itv Dengan TV interaktif, beberapa stasiun penyiaran digital mengombinasikan program TV normalnya dengan halaman informasi atau hiburan. Di beberapa halaman, Anda dapat merespons program atau memvoting, melakukan belanja online atau membayar program video atas permintaan. HbbTV, MHEG,... Stasiun penyiaran menggunakan berbagai sistem TV interaktif: HbbTV (Hybrid Broadcast Broadband TV) atau itv (Interactive TV - MHEG). TV interaktif 15

16 terkadang dikenal dengan Teks Digital atau tombol Merah. Tetapi masing-masing sistem tersebut berbeda. Kunjungi situs web Internet stasiun penyiaran untuk informasi selengkapnya. Apa yang Anda Perlukan TV interaktif hanya tersedia pada saluran TV digital. Untuk menikmati keuntungan penuh TV Interaktif, Anda memerlukan sambungan Internet kecepatan tinggi (broadband) ke TV. HbbTV Jika saluran TV menawarkan halaman HbbTV, Anda harus menyalakan HbbTV di pengaturan TV untuk melihat halaman. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Lanjutan > HbbTV > Aktif. Menggunakan itv Membuka halaman itv Kebanyakan saluran yang menawarkan HbbTV atau itv mengundang Anda untuk menekan tombol atau tombol OK untuk membuka program interaktifnya. Menavigasikan halaman itv Anda dapat menggunakan tombol panah dan warna, tombol nomor dan tombol BACK untuk menavigasi halaman itv. Anda dapat menggunakan tombol (Putar), (Jeda) dan (Hentikan) untuk menonton video di halaman itv. Teks Digital (Inggris saja) Untuk membuka Teks Digital, tekan TEXT. Untuk menutup, tekan BACK. Menutup halaman itv Kebanyakan halaman itv memberi tahu Anda tombol mana yang digunakan untuk menutup. Untuk menutup paksa halaman itv, alihkan ke saluran TV berikutnya dan tekan BACK. 16

17 penyejajaran parabola antena Anda. Hal ini akan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit. Jika satelit ditemukan, nama dan kekuatan penerimaan ditampilkan di layar. 8 - Jika TV menemukan satelit yang Anda inginkan, pilih Pasang. 9 - Jika satelit menawarkan Paket Saluran, TV akan menampilkan paket yang tersedia untuk satelit tersebut. Pilih paket yang Anda perlukan. Beberapa paket menawarkan penginstalan Cepat atau Lengkap untuk saluran yang tersedia, pilih salah satu. TV akan menginstal saluran satelit dan stasiun radio Untuk menyimpan konfigurasi satelit, saluran yang terinstal dan stasiun radio, pilih Selesai. 5 Penginstalan Saluran 5.1 Pemasangan Satelit Tentang Memasang Satelit Hingga 4 Satelit Anda dapat memasang hingga 4 satelit (4 LNB) pada TV ini. Pilih jumlah satelit pasti yang ingin Anda instal di permulaan penginstalan. Tindakan ini akan mempercepat penginstalan. Pengaturan Pemasangan Satelit Unicable Pengaturan pemasangan satelit dipreset sesuai negara Anda. Pengaturan ini menentukan bagaimana TV mencari dan memasang satelit serta salurannya. Anda selalu bisa mengubah pengaturan ini. Anda dapat menggunakan sistem Unicable untuk menyambungkan antena parabola ke TV. Anda dapat memilih 1 atau 2 satelit di awal pemasangan. MDU - Multi-Dwelling-Unit Untuk mengubah pengaturan pemasangan satelit Tuner satelit bawaan mendukung MDU pada satelit Astra dan Digiturk pada satelit Eutelsat. MDU pada Türksat tidak didukung. 1 - Mulai pemasangan satelit. 2 - Di layar tempat Anda bisa mencari satelit, pilih Pengaturan dan 3 - Pilih jumlah satelit yang ingin Anda pasang atau pilih salah satu sistem Unicable. Jika Anda memilih Unicable, Anda dapat memilih Nomor Pita Pengguna dan memasukkan Frekuensi Pita Pengguna untuk tiap tuner. 4 - Jika selesai, pilih Berikutnya dan 5 - Di menu Pengaturan, tekan tombol berwarna Selesai untuk kembali ke layar untuk mulai mencari satelit. Memulai Penginstalan Pastikan parabola satelit Anda tersambung dengan tepat dan disejajarkan dengan baik sebelum memulai penginstalan. Untuk memulai pemasangan satelit 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Satelit dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 3 - Pilih Cari Satelit dan 4 - Pilih Cari dan TV akan mencari satelit. 5 - Pilih Instal dan TV menampilkan konfigurasi pemasangan satelit saat ini. Jika Anda ingin mengubah konfigurasi ini, pilih Pengaturan. Jika Anda tidak ingin mengubah konfigurasi, pilih Cari. Lanjutkan ke langkah 5. Transponder Rumah dan LNB Di beberapa negara, Anda bisa menyesuaikan pengaturan mahir untuk transponder rumah dan setiap LNB. Hanya gunakan atau ubah pengaturan ini jika penginstalan normal gagal dilakukan. Jika Anda menggunakan peralatan satelit non-standar, Anda bisa menggunakan pengaturan ini untuk membatalkan pengaturan standar. Beberapa penyedia mungkin memberi Anda beberapa nilai transponder atau LNB yang bisa dimasukkan di sini. 6 - Di Sistem Penginstalan, pilih jumlah satelit yang ingin Anda instal atau pilih salah satu sistem Unicable. Jika Anda memilih Unicable, Anda dapat memilih Nomor Pita Pengguna dan memasukkan Frekuensi Pita Pengguna untuk tiap tuner. Di beberapa negara, Anda dapat menyesuaikan beberapa pengaturan mahir untuk tiap LNB di Pengaturan Selengkapnya. 7 - TV akan mencari satelit yang tersedia saat CAM Satelit Jika Anda menggunakan CAM Modul Akses Bersyarat dengan kartu pintar untuk menonton saluran satelit, sebaiknya melakukan penginstalan satelit dengan CAM terpasang pada TV. Sebagian besar CAM digunakan untuk mengatasi saluran yang diacak. 17

18 CAM generasi terbaru (CI+ 1.3 dengan Profil Operator), dapat menginstal semua saluran satelit sendiri pada TV Anda. CAM akan mengundang Anda untuk menginstal satelit dan salurannya. CAM tersebut tidak hanya menginstal dan mengurut saluran tetapi juga menangani pembaruan saluran secara berkala. switchbox Unicable yang menawarkan 4 atau 8 pita pengguna. Jika Anda memilih Unicable di pengaturan, TV akan meminta Anda untuk menetapkan nomor pita pengguna yang unik untuk tiap tuner satelit bawaan. Tuner satelit tidak boleh memiliki nomor pita pengguna yang sama dengan satelit lain di sistem Unicable. Paket Saluran Frekuensi Pita Pengguna Operator satelit dapat menawarkan paket saluran yang menyatukan saluran gratis (tayangan gratis) dan menawarkan urutan yang sesuai dengan negara. Beberapa satelit menawarkan paket langganan kumpulan saluran berbayar. Di dekat nomor pita pengguna yang unik, penerima satelit bawaan memerlukan frekuensi dari nomor pita pengguna yang dipilih. Frekuensi tersebut sering ditampilkan di dekat nomor pita pengguna pada switchbox Unicable. Jika Anda memilih paket langganan, TV mungkin akan meminta Anda untuk memilih penginstalan Cepat atau Lengkap. Pilih Cepat untuk menginstal saluran paket saja atau pilih Lengkap untuk menginstal paket dan juga semua saluran yang tersedia. Kami menyarankan penginstalan Cepat untuk paket langganan. Jika Anda memiliki satelit tambahan yang bukan termasuk dari paket langganan Anda, kami menyarankan penginstalan Penuh. Semua saluran yang diinstal disimpan di daftar saluran Semua. Pembaruan Saluran Manual Anda akan selalu dapat melakukan pembaruan saluran. Untuk memulai pembaruan saluran secara manual 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Satelit dan 3 - Pilih Cari Saluran dan 4 - Pilih Perbarui Saluran dan TV akan mulai melakukan pembaruan. Pembaruan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit. 5 - Ikuti petunjuk pada layar. Pembaruan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit. 6 - Pilih Selesai dan Konfigurasi Unicable Sistem Unicable Anda dapat menggunakan sistem Kabel Tunggal, MDU atau sistem Unicable untuk menyambungkan parabola antena ke TV. Sistem Kabel Tunggal menggunakan satu kabel untuk menyambungkan parabola antena ke semua tuner satelit di sistemnya. Sistem Kabel Tunggal biasanya digunakan di bangunan apartemen. Jika Anda menggunakan sistem Unicable, TV akan meminta Anda untuk menetapkan nomor pita pengguna dan frekuensi yang terkait saat penginstalan. Anda dapat menginstal 1 atau 2 satelit dengan Unicable pada TV ini. Menambah Satelit Anda dapat menambahkan satelit ke penginstalan satelit Anda saat ini. Satelit yang diinstal dan salurannya tidak berubah. Beberapa operator satelit tidak mengizinkan penambahan satelit. Jika Anda mengetahui beberapa saluran lenyap setelah penginstalan Unicable, penginstalan lain mungkin telah dilakukan di saat yang sama pada sistem Unicable. Lakukan penginstalan lagi untuk menginstal saluran yang hilang. Satelit tambahan akan terlihat sebagai ekstra, satelit tambahan bukanlah langganan satelit utama atau bukan satelit utama yang Anda gunakan paket salurannya. Biasanya, Anda akan menambah satelit ke-4 setelah menginstal 3 satelit. Jika sudah menginstal 4 satelit, Anda mungkin mempertimbangkan untuk menghapus satu satelit agar dapat menambah satelit baru. Nomor Pita Pengguna Mengonfigurasi Di sistem Unicable, tiap tuner satelit yang tersambung harus diberi nomor (misalnya, 0, 1, 2 atau 3 dll.). Jika Anda saat ini hanya menginstal 1 atau 2 satelit, pengaturan penginstalan saat ini mungkin tidak mengizinkan penambahan satelit ekstra. Jika Anda perlu mengubah pengaturan penginstalan, Anda harus mengulangi penginstalan satelit lengkap. Anda tidak dapat menggunakan Tambah satelit jika Anda dapat menemukan pita pengguna yang tersedia beserta nomornya di switchbox Unicable. Pita pengguna terkadang disingkat dengan UB. Ada 18

19 pengaturan perlu diubah. 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Satelit dan 3 - Pilih Pemasangan Manual dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 4 - Jika lebih dari 1 satelit yang terinstal, pilih LNB yang ingin Anda tambah salurannya. 5 - Atur Polarisasi yang Anda perlukan. Jika Anda mengatur Mode Kecepatan Simbol ke Manual, Anda dapat memasukkan peringkat simbol di Peringkat Simbol secara manual. 6 - Tekan panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan frekuensi, dan pilih Selesai. 7 - Pilih Cari dan Kekuatan sinyal ditampilkan di layar. 8 - Jika Anda ingin menyimpan saluran transponder baru, pilih Simpan dan 9 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Untuk menambah satelit 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Satelit dan 3 - Pilih Cari satelit dan 4 - Pilih Tambah Satelit dan Satelit saat ini ditampilkan. 5 - Pilih Cari dan TV akan mencari satelit baru. 6 - Jika TV menemukan satu atau beberapa satelit, pilih Instal dan TV akan menginstal saluran dari satelit yang ditemukan. 7 - Pilih Selesai dan tekan OK untuk menyimpan saluran dan stasiun radio. Menghapus Satelit Anda dapat menghapus satu atau beberapa satelit dari penginstalan satelit saat ini. Anda menghapus satelit dan salurannya. Beberapa operator satelit tidak mengizinkan penghapusan satelit. Transponder Rumah dan LNB Di beberapa negara, Anda bisa menyesuaikan pengaturan mahir untuk transponder rumah dan setiap LNB. Hanya gunakan atau ubah pengaturan ini jika penginstalan normal gagal dilakukan. Jika Anda menggunakan peralatan satelit non-standar, Anda bisa menggunakan pengaturan ini untuk membatalkan pengaturan standar. Beberapa penyedia mungkin memberi Anda beberapa nilai transponder atau LNB yang bisa dimasukkan di sini. Untuk menghapus satelit 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Satelit dan 3 - Pilih Cari satelit dan 4 - Pilih Hapus Satelit dan Satelit saat ini ditampilkan. 5 - Pilih satelit dan tekan OK untuk memberi tanda atau batal memberi tanda untuk dihapus. 6 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Daya LNB Secara default, Daya LNB diatur ke Aktif. Nada 22 khz Secara default, Nada diatur ke Otomatis. Frekuensi LO Rendah/Frekuensi LO Tinggi Penginstalan Manual Frekuensi osilator lokal diatur ke nilai Standar. Sesuaikan nilai hanya pada kasus peralatan tertentu yang memerlukan nilai berbeda. Penginstalan Manual dimaksudkan untuk pengguna ahli. Anda dapat menggunakan Penginstalan Manual untuk mempercepat penambahan saluran baru dari transponder satelit. Anda perlu mengetahui frekuensi dan polarisasi transponder. TV akan menginstal semua saluran transponder tersebut. Jika transponder sebelumnya telah diinstal, semua salurannya transponder sebelumnya dan yang baru - dipindah ke bagian akhir daftar saluran Semua. Anda tidak dapat menggunakan penginstalan Manual bila perlu mengubah nomor satelit. Jika diperlukan, Anda harus melakukan penginstalan lengkap dengan Instal Satelit. Permasalahan TV tidak dapat menemukan satelit yang saya inginkan atau TV menginstal satelit yang sama dua kali Pastikan jumlah satelit yang benar diatur di Pengaturan pada awal penginstalan. Anda dapat mengatur TV untuk mencari Satu, Dua atau 3/4 satelit. LNB dua kepala tidak dapat menemukan satelit kedua Untuk menginstal transponder Jika TV menemukan satu satelit tetapi tidak dapat menemukan satelit kedua, putar antena parabola 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 19

20 beberapa derajat. Luruskan antena parabola untuk mendapatkan sinyal terkuat pada satelit pertama. Periksalah indikator kekuatan sinyal satelit pertama di layar. Setelah satelit pertama diatur ke sinyal terkuat, pilih Cari lagi untuk menemukan satelit kedua. Pastikan pengaturan diatur ke Dua Satelit. Untuk menonaktifkan pembaruan otomatis 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Antena/Kabel dan 3 - Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 4 - Pilih Pembaruan Saluran Otomatis dan 5 - Pilih Tidak aktif dan 6 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk kembali ke menu. Mengubah pengaturan penginstalan tidak akan menyelesaikan masalah saya Semua pengaturan, satelit dan saluran hanya disimpan di akhir penginstalan ketika Anda selesai. Semua saluran satelit hilang Saat saluran baru ditemukan atau jika saluran diperbarui atau dihapus, akan muncul pesan pada saat penyalaan TV. Agar pesan ini tidak muncul setelah tiap kali pembaruan saluran, Anda dapat menonaktifkannya. Jika menggunakan sistem Unicable, pastikan Anda menetapkan dua nomor pita pengguna yang unik untuk kedua tuner bawaan di pengaturan Unicable. Mungkin penerima satelit lain di sistem Unicable Anda menggunakan nomor pita pengguna yang sama. Untuk menonaktifkan pesan Beberapa saluran satelit sepertinya hilang dari daftar 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Antena/Kabel dan 3 - Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 4 - Pilih Pesan Pembaruan Saluran dan 5 - Pilih Tidak aktif dan 6 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk kembali ke menu. saluran Jika beberapa saluran terlihat hilang atau berpindah, mungkin stasiun penyiaran mengubah lokasi transponder saluran ini. Untuk mengembalikan posisi saluran di daftar saluran, Anda dapat mencoba untuk memperbarui paket saluran. Saya tidak dapat menghapus satelit Di beberapa negara, pembaruan saluran Otomatis dilakukan saat menonton TV atau saat TV dalam status siaga. Paket langganan tidak memungkinkan penghapusan satelit. Untuk menghapus satelit, Anda harus melakukan penginstalan lengkap lagi dan memilih paket lain. Ada kalanya penerimaan buruk Pembaruan Saluran Manual Periksalah apakah antena parabola satelit terpasang dengan kuat. Angin kencang dapat menggerakkan antena parabola. Salju dan hujan dapat menurunkan tingkat penerimaan. Anda akan selalu dapat melakukan pembaruan saluran. Untuk memulai pembaruan saluran secara manual 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Antena/Kabel dan 3 - Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 4 - Pilih Cari Saluran dan 5 - Pilih Mulai dan 6 - Pilih Perbarui Saluran Digital, pilih Berikutnya dan 7 - Pilih Mulai dan tekan OK untuk memperbarui saluran digital. Hal ini akan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit. 8 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk kembali ke menu. 5.2 Pemasangan Antena/Kabel Memperbarui Saluran Pembaruan Saluran Otomatis Jika Anda menerima saluran digital, Anda dapat mengatur TV agar memperbarui daftar saluran secara otomatis. Sekali dalam sehari, pada jam 6 pagi, TV memperbarui saluran dan menyimpan saluran baru. Saluran baru disimpan di Daftar Saluran dan ditandai dengan. Saluran tanpa sinyal dihapus. TV harus dalam status siaga untuk memperbarui saluran secara otomatis. Anda dapat menonaktifkan Pembaruan Saluran Otomatis. 20

21 Menginstal Ulang Saluran DVB-T atau DVB-C Menginstal Ulang Semua Saluran Penerimaan DVB-T atau DVB-C Anda dapat menginstal ulang semua saluran dan membiarkan semua pengaturan TV lainnya. Saat penginstalan saluran, tepat sebelum Anda mencari saluran, Pilih Antena (DVB-T) atau Kabel (DVB-C). Antena DVB-T/T2 mencari saluran analog terestrial dan saluran DVB-T digital. Kabel DVB-C mencari saluran analog dan digital yang tersedia dari operator kabel DVB-C. Jika kode PIN diatur, Anda harus memasukkan kode ini agar dapat menginstal ulang saluran. Untuk menginstal ulang saluran 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Antena/Kabel dan 3 - Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 4 - Pilih Cari Saluran dan 5 - Pilih Mulai dan 6 - Pilih Instal Ulang Saluran, pilih Berikutnya dan 7 - Pilih negara tempat Anda berada sekarang dan 8 - Pilih Berikutnya dan 9 - Pilih jenis penginstalan yang Anda inginkan, Antena (DVB-T) atau Kabel (DVB-C) dan 8 - Pilih Berikutnya dan 11 - Pilih jenis saluran yang Anda inginkan, Saluran Digital dan Analog atau Hanya Saluran Digital dan 8 - Pilih Berikutnya dan 13 - Pilih Mulai dan tekan OK untuk memperbarui saluran digital. Hal ini akan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk kembali ke menu. Penginstalan Saluran DVB-C Untuk memudahkan penggunaan, semua pengaturan DVB-C diatur ke otomatis. Jika operator DVB-C Anda memberi Anda nilai DVB-C spesifik, ID jaringan atau frekuensi jaringan, masukkan nilai-nilai ini jika TV memintanya selama penginstalan. Konflik Nomor Saluran Di beberapa negara, saluran TV yang berbeda (stasiun penyiaran) mungkin memiliki nomor saluran yang sama. Saat menginstal, TV menampilkan daftar konflik nomor saluran. Anda harus memilih saluran TV mana yang ingin Anda instal pada nomor saluran dengan beberapa saluran TV. Pengaturan DVB Mode Frekuensi Jaringan Jika Anda bermaksud untuk menggunakan cara Pindai Cepat di Pemindaian Frek. untuk mencari saluran, pilih Otomatis. TV akan menggunakan 1 frekuensi jaringan yang telah ditetapkan (atau HC - saluran rumah) seperti yang digunakan oleh sebagian besar operator TV kabel di negara Anda. Menginstal Ulang TV Anda dapat menginstal ulang TV sepenuhnya. TV sepenuhnya diinstal ulang. Jika Anda menerima nilai frekuensi jaringan spesifik untuk mencari saluran, pilih Manual. Untuk menginstal ulang TV sepenuhnya 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Umum > Instal Ulang TV dan 3 - Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 4 - Pilih Ya dan tekan OK untuk mengonfirmasi. 5 - TV akan diinstal ulang sepenuhnya. Semua pengaturan akan direset dan saluran yang diinstal akan diganti. Penginstalan ini akan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit. 6 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk kembali ke menu. Frekuensi Jaringan Saat Mode Frekuensi Jaringan ditetapkan ke Manual, Anda dapat memasukkan nilai frekuensi jaringan yang diterima dari operator TV kabel di sini. Untuk memasukkan nilai, gunakan tombol angka. Pemindaian Frekuensi Pilih cara pencarian saluran. Anda dapat memilih cara Pindai Cepat yang lebih cepat dan menggunakan pengaturan yang telah ditetapkan yang digunakan oleh sebagian besar operator TV kabel di negara Anda. 21

22 Jika tidak ada saluran yang terinstal pada hasil pencarian atau jika beberapa saluran hilang, Anda dapat memilih cara Pemindaian Penuh lanjutan. Cara untuk mencari dan menginstal saluran ini akan menghabiskan lebih banyak waktu. ditampilkan untuk saluran ini. 6 - Pilih Cari kembali dan tekan OK untuk memeriksa kualitas sinyal frekuensi ini. Hasil uji ditampilkan di layar. Anda bisa mengubah posisi antena atau memeriksa sambungan untuk meningkatkan penerimaan. 7 - Anda juga bisa mengubah frekuensinya. Pilih nomor frekuensi satu per satu dan gunakan tombol (naik) atau (turun) untuk mengubah nilainya. Pilih Cari dan tekan OK untuk menguji penerimaan kembali. 8 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Ukuran Langkah Frekuensi TV mencari saluran pada kelipatan 8MHz. Jika tidak ada saluran yang diinstal atau jika beberapa saluran hilang, Anda dapat mencari di kelipatan yang lebih kecil 1MHz. Menggunakan kelipatan 1MHz akan memerlukan waktu lebih lama untuk mencari dan menginstal saluran. Penginstalan Manual Saluran TV analog dapat diinstal secara manual, saluran demi saluran. Saluran Digital Jika Anda tahu operator TV kabel Anda tidak menawarkan saluran digital, Anda dapat melewati pencarian saluran digital. Untuk menginstal saluran analog secara manual 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Antena/Kabel dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 3 - Pilih Analog: Penginstalan Manual dan Saluran Analog Jika Anda tahu operator TV kabel Anda tidak menawarkan saluran analog, Anda dapat melewati pencarian saluran analog. Sistem Untuk mengonfigurasi sistem TV, pilih Sistem. Pilih negara atau bagian dunia tempat Anda berada sekarang dan Bebas/Acak Cari Saluran Untuk mencari saluran, pilih Cari Saluran dan Anda bisa memasukkan sendiri frekuensi untuk mencari saluran atau membiarkan TV yang mencari saluran. Tekan (kanan) untuk memilih Cari dan tekan OK untuk mencari saluran secara otomatis. Saluran yang ditemukan ditampilkan di layar dan jika penerimaannya buruk, tekan Cari lagi. Jika Anda ingin menyimpan saluran, pilih Selesai dan Jika Anda telah berlangganan dan memiliki CAM Modul Akses Bersyarat untuk layanan TV berbayar, pilih Bebas + Acak. Jika Anda tidak berlangganan untuk saluran atau layanan TV berbayar, Anda dapat memilih Saluran Bebas Saja. Untuk informasi selengkapnya, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari CAM, Modul Akses Bersyarat. Simpan Anda dapat menyimpan saluran pada nomor saluran saat ini atau sebagai nomor saluran baru. Pilih Simpan Saluran Saat Ini atau Simpan sbg Sal. Baru dan Nomor saluran baru ditampilkan sebentar. Kualitas Penerimaan Anda dapat memeriksa kualitas dan kekuatan sinyal saluran digital. Jika Anda memiliki antena sendiri, Anda dapat mengubah posisi antena untuk mencoba dan meningkatkan penerimaan. Anda dapat mengulangi langkah-langkah ini hingga Anda menemukan semua saluran TV analog yang tersedia. Untuk memeriksa kualitas penerimaan saluran digital 1 - Cari saluran. 2 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 3 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Antena/Kabel dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 4 - Pilih Digital: Uji Penerimaan dan 5 - Pilih Cari dan Frekuensi digital akan 22

23 Anak untuk menyalin daftar saluran. 6 - Ketika penyalinan selesai, lepaskan flash drive USB. 7 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. 5.3 Salinan Daftar Saluran Pendahuluan Sekarang Anda dapat mengunggah daftar saluran yang disalin ke TV Philips lainnya. Salinan Daftar Saluran diperuntukkan untuk dealer dan pengguna mahir. Dengan Salinan Daftar Saluran, Anda dapat menyalin saluran yang terinstal di satu TV ke TV Philips lainnya dalam rentang yang sama. Dengan Salinan Daftar Saluran, Anda akan menghemat waktu yang diperlukan untuk pencarian saluran dengan mengunggah daftar saluran yang telah ditetapkan pada TV. Gunakan flash drive USB berkapasitas minimal 1 GB. Versi Daftar Saluran Periksa versi daftar saluran saat ini Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Salinan Daftar Saluran dan pilih Versi Saat Ini, lalu 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Ketentuan Kedua TV dari rentang tahun yang sama. Kedua TV memiliki jenis perangkat keras yang sama. Periksa jenis perangkat keras di pelat jenis TV di bagian belakang. Biasanya tertulis Q... LA Kedua TV memiliki versi perangkat lunak yang kompatibel. Mengunggah Daftar Saluran Versi saluran saat ini Untuk memeriksa versi daftar saluran saat ini Ke TV yang Belum Diinstal 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran, pilih Salinan Daftar Saluran, pilih Versi Saat Ini dan 3 - Tekan OK untuk menutupnya. Bergantung pada apakah TV Anda telah diinstal atau belum, Anda harus menggunakan cara berbeda untuk mengunggah daftar saluran. Ke TV yang belum diinstal 1 - Masukkan steker daya untuk memulai penginstalan dan memilih bahasa dan negara. Anda dapat melewati pencarian saluran. Selesaikan penginstalan. 2 - Pasang flash drive USB yang menyimpan daftar saluran TV lainnya. 3 - Untuk mulai mengunggah daftar saluran, tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 4 - Pilih Saluran > Salinan Daftar Saluran > Salin ke TV dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 5 - TV memberi tahu Anda jika daftar saluran telah berhasil disalin ke TV. Cabut flash drive USB. Versi perangkat lunak terbaru Untuk memeriksa versi perangkat TV saat ini 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Perbarui prgkt lunak dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Info Perangkat Lunak Saat Ini dan 4 - Versi, catatan rilis dan tanggal pembuatan akan ditampilkan. Selain itu, Nomor ESN Netflix juga ditampilkan, jika ada. 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Ke TV yang Sudah Diinstal Bergantung pada apakah TV Anda telah diinstal atau belum, Anda harus menggunakan cara berbeda untuk mengunggah daftar saluran. Menyalin Daftar Saluran Untuk menyalin daftar saluran Ke TV yang telah terinstal 1 - Verifikasi pengaturan negara TV. (Untuk memverifikasi pengaturan ini, lihat bab Menginstal Ulang Semua Saluran. Mulai prosedur ini hingga Anda sampai pada pengaturan negara. Tekan KEMBALI untuk membatalkan penginstalan.) Jika negaranya benar, lanjutkan ke langkah Menyalakan TV. TV sudah terinstal saluran. 2 - Pasang flash drive USB. 3 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 4 - Pilih Saluran > Salinan Daftar Saluran dan 5 - Pilih Salin ke USB dan Anda mungkin diminta untuk memasukkan kode PIN Penguncian 23

24 Jika negaranya salah, Anda harus mengulangi penginstalan. Lihat bab Menginstal Ulang Semua Saluran dan mulai penginstalan. Pilih negara yang tepat dan lewati pencarian saluran. Selesaikan penginstalan. Jika selesai, lanjutkan ke langkah Pasang flash drive USB yang menyimpan daftar saluran TV lainnya. 3 - Untuk mulai mengunggah daftar saluran, tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 4 - Pilih Saluran > Salinan Daftar Saluran > Salin ke TV dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 5 - TV memberi tahu Anda jika daftar saluran telah berhasil disalin ke TV. Cabut flash drive USB. Menyalin Daftar Saluran Untuk menyalin daftar saluran 1 - Menyalakan TV. TV sudah terinstal saluran. 2 - Pasang flash drive USB. 3 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 4 - Pilih Saluran > Salinan daftar satelit dan 5 - Pilih Salin ke USB dan Anda mungkin diminta untuk memasukkan kode PIN Penguncian Anak untuk menyalin daftar saluran. 6 - Ketika penyalinan selesai, lepaskan flash drive USB. 7 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. 5.4 Salinan Daftar Satelit Sekarang Anda dapat mengunggah daftar saluran yang disalin ke TV Philips lainnya. Pendahuluan Salinan daftar satelit ditujukan bagi dealer dan pengguna mahir. Versi Daftar Saluran Dengan Salinan daftar satelit, Anda dapat menyalin saluran yang terinstal di satu TV ke TV Philips lainnya dalam rentang yang sama. Dengan Salinan daftar satelit, Anda akan menghemat waktu yang diperlukan untuk pencarian saluran dengan mengunggah daftar saluran yang telah ditetapkan pada TV. Gunakan flash drive USB berkapasitas minimal 1 GB. Periksa versi daftar saluran saat ini Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Salinan daftar satelit dan pilih Versi Saat Ini, lalu 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Ketentuan Kedua TV dari rentang tahun yang sama. Kedua TV memiliki jenis perangkat keras yang sama. Periksa jenis perangkat keras di pelat jenis TV di bagian belakang. Biasanya tertulis Q... LA Kedua TV memiliki versi perangkat lunak yang kompatibel. Mengunggah Daftar Saluran Versi saluran saat ini Ke TV yang Belum Diinstal Untuk memeriksa versi daftar saluran saat ini Bergantung pada apakah TV Anda telah diinstal atau belum, Anda harus menggunakan cara berbeda untuk mengunggah daftar saluran. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran, pilih Salinan daftar satelit, pilih Versi Saat Ini dan 3 - Tekan OK untuk menutupnya. Ke TV yang belum diinstal 1 - Masukkan steker daya untuk memulai penginstalan dan memilih bahasa dan negara. Anda dapat melewati pencarian saluran. Selesaikan penginstalan. 2 - Pasang flash drive USB yang menyimpan daftar saluran TV lainnya. 3 - Untuk mulai mengunggah daftar saluran, tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 4 - Pilih Saluran > Salinan daftar satelit > Salin ke TV dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 5 - TV memberi tahu Anda jika daftar saluran telah berhasil disalin ke TV. Cabut flash drive USB. Versi perangkat lunak terbaru Untuk memeriksa versi perangkat TV saat ini 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Perbarui prgkt lunak dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Info Perangkat Lunak Saat Ini dan 4 - Versi, catatan rilis dan tanggal pembuatan akan ditampilkan. Selain itu, Nomor ESN Netflix juga ditampilkan, jika ada. 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. 24

25 Ke TV yang Sudah Diinstal Bergantung pada apakah TV Anda telah diinstal atau belum, Anda harus menggunakan cara berbeda untuk mengunggah daftar saluran. Ke TV yang telah terinstal 1 - Verifikasi pengaturan negara TV. (Untuk memverifikasi pengaturan ini, lihat bab Menginstal Ulang Semua Saluran. Mulai prosedur ini hingga Anda sampai pada pengaturan negara. Tekan BACK untuk membatalkan penginstalan.) Jika negaranya benar, lanjutkan ke langkah 2. Jika negaranya salah, Anda harus mengulangi penginstalan. Lihat bab Menginstal Ulang Semua Saluran dan mulai penginstalan. Pilih negara yang tepat dan lewati pencarian saluran. Selesaikan penginstalan. Jika selesai, lanjutkan ke langkah Pasang flash drive USB yang menyimpan daftar saluran TV lainnya. 3 - Untuk mulai mengunggah daftar saluran, tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 4 - Pilih Saluran > Salinan daftar satelit > Salin ke TV dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 5 - TV memberi tahu Anda jika daftar saluran telah berhasil disalin ke TV. Cabut flash drive USB. 25

26 Kabel HDMI mendukung HDCP 2.2 (Perlindungan Konten Digital Bandwidth-tinggi). HDCP adalah sinyal perlindungan hak cipta yang mencegah penyalinan konten dari disk DVD atau Disk Blu-ray. Disebut juga sebagai DRM (Digital Rights Management/Manajemen Hak Digital ). 6 Menyambungkan Perangkat 6.1 Tentang Sambungan HDMI ARC Semua sambungan HDMI pada TV memiliki HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel). Panduan Konektivitas Jika perangkat, biasanya Sistem Home Theatre (HTS), juga memiliki sambungan HDMI ARC, sambungkan ke sambungan HDMI mana saja pada TV ini. Dengan sambungan HDMI ARC, Anda tidak perlu menyambungkan kabel audio ekstra yang mengirimkan suara dari gambar TV ke HTS. Sambungan HDMI ARC menggabungkan kedua sinyal tersebut. Selalu sambungkan perangkat pada TV dengan sambungan berkualitas tertinggi yang tersedia. Selain itu, gunakan kabel berkualitas bagus untuk memastikan transfer gambar dan suara berjalan baik. Saat Anda menyambungkan perangkat, TV mengenali jenisnya dan memberikan nama jenis yang tepat untuk masing-masing perangkat. Anda dapat mengubah nama jenis jika menginginkannya. Jika nama jenis yang tepat untuk sebuah perangkat sudah ditetapkan, TV secara otomatis beralih ke pengaturan TV yang ideal saat Anda beralih ke perangkat ini di menu Sumber. Anda dapat menggunakan sambungan HDMI mana saja pada TV ini untuk menyambungkan HTS namun ARC hanya tersedia untuk 1 perangkat/sambungan pada waktu bersamaan. Port antena Jika Anda memiliki Set-top box (penerima digital) atau Recorder, sambungkan kabel antena untuk mengarahkan sinyal antena melalui Set-top box dan/atau Recorder terlebih dahulu sebelum masuk ke TV. Dengan cara ini, antena dan Set-top box dapat mengirim kemungkinan saluran tambahan ke Recorder untuk melakukan perekaman. Port HDMI HDMI MHL Dengan HDMI MHL, Anda dapat mengirim apa yang Anda lihat pada smartphone Android atau tablet ke layar TV Anda. Kualitas HDMI Sambungan HDMI memiliki kualitas gambar dan suara terbaik. Satu kabel HDMI menggabungkan sinyal video dan audio. Gunakan kabel HDMI untuk sinyal TV. Sambungan HDMI 1 pada TV ini menggunakan MHL 2.0 (Mobile High-Definition Link). Untuk kualitas transfer sinyal terbaik, gunakan kabel HDMI Berkecepatan tinggi dan jangan menggunakan kabel HDMI yang panjangnya lebih dari 5 m. Sambungan kabel ini memiliki stabilitas dan bandwith tinggi, latensi rendah, tidak ada interferensi nirkabel dan reproduksi suara kualitas bagus. Selain itu, sambungan MHL akan mengisi daya baterai smartphone atau tablet Anda. Meskipun tersambung, perangkat mobile Anda tidak akan diisi dayanya jika TV dalam status siaga. Jika perangkat yang tersambung dengan HDMI tidak berfungsi dengan benar, periksa apakah pengaturan HDMI Ultra HD yang berbeda dapat mengatasi masalah ini. Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari HDMI Ultra HD. Cari informasi apakah kabel MHL pasif sesuai untuk Perlindungan hak cipta 26

27 perangkat mobile Anda. Secara khusus, dengan konektor HDMI untuk TV pada satu sisi, pastikan jenis konektor yang perlu Anda sambungkan ke smartphone atau tablet. 6.2 CAM dengan Kartu Pintar CI+ MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link dan Logo MHL adalah merek dagang atau merek dagang terdaftar dari MHL, LLC. CI+ TV ini siap digunakan untuk Akses Bersyarat CI+. Dengan CI+, Anda dapat menonton program HD premium, seperti film dan olahraga, yang ditawarkan oleh operator TV digital di wilayah Anda. Program ini diacak oleh operator TV dan diurutkan dengan modul CI+ prabayar. Operator TV digital menyediakan modul CI+ (Modul Akses Bersyarat - CAM) dan kartu pintar yang disertai, saat Anda berlangganan program premiumnya. Program ini dilengkapi tingkat perlindungan hak cipta yang tinggi. HDMI CEC - EasyLink Sambungan HDMI memiliki kualitas gambar dan suara terbaik. Satu kabel HDMI menggabungkan sinyal video dan audio. Gunakan kabel HDMI untuk sinyal TV High Definition (HD). Untuk kualitas transfer sinyal terbaik, gunakan kabel HDMI Berkecepatan tinggi dan jangan menggunakan kabel HDMI yang panjangnya lebih dari 5 m. Hubungi operator TV digital untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang syarat & ketentuannya. Sambungkan perangkat yang kompatibel dengan HDMI CEC ke TV, Anda dapat mengoperasikannya dengan remote control TV. EasyLink HDMI CEC harus diaktifkan pada TV dan perangkat yang tersambung. Mengaktifkan EasyLink Kartu Pintar (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > EasyLink > EasyLink > Aktif. Operator TV digital menyediakan modul CI+ (Modul Akses Bersyarat - CAM) dan kartu pintar yang disertai, saat Anda berlangganan program premiumnya. Mengoperasikan perangkat yang kompatibel Masukkan kartu pintar ke dalam modul CAM. Lihat petunjuk yang Anda terima dari operator. HDMI CEC dengan remote control TV Untuk memasukkan CAM pada TV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > EasyLink > Remote control EasyLink > Aktif. 1 - Perhatikan CAM apakah metode untuk memasukkannya benar. Bila dimasukkan secara keliru, CAM dan TV bisa mengalami kerusakan. 2 - Sambil melihat bagian belakang TV, dengan bagian depan CAM menghadap ke arah Anda, masukkan CAM secara perlahan ke slot COMMON INTERFACE. 3 - Tekan masuk CAM sejauh mungkin. Biarkan CAM berada di slot secara permanen. Catatan: EasyLink mungkin tidak berfungsi pada perangkat dari merek lain. Fungsionalitas HDMI CEC memiliki nama yang berbeda pada merek yang berbeda. Beberapa contohnya adalah: Anynet, Aquos Link, Bravia Theatre Sync, Kuro Link, Simplink dan Viera Link. Tidak semua merek sepenuhnya kompatibel dengan EasyLink. Contoh nama merek HDMI CEC adalah properti masing-masing pemiliknya. 27

28 Menyambungkan dengan HDMI ARC Gunakan kabel HDMI untuk menyambungkan Sistem Home Theatre (HTS) ke TV. Anda dapat menyambungkan Soundbar Philips atau HTS dengan pemutar disk bawaan. HDMI ARC Jika Sistem Home Theatre Anda dilengkapi sambungan HDMI ARC, Anda dapat menggunakan sabungan HDMI mana pun pada TV untuk menyambungkannya. Dengan HDMI ARC, Anda tidak perlu menyambungkan kabel audio tambahan. Sambungan HDMI ARC menggabungkan kedua sinyal tersebut. Semua sambungan HDMI pada TV dapat menghadirkan sinyal Audio Return Channel (ARC). Tetapi begitu Anda menyambungkan Sistem Home Theatre, TV hanya dapat mengirimkan sinyal ARC ke sambungan HDMI ini. Saat Anda menyalakan TV, dibutuhkan beberapa menit sebelum CAM aktif. Jika CAM dimasukkan dan biaya langganan telah dibayar (metode langganan bisa berbeda), Anda dapat menonton saluran yang diacak, yang didukung oleh kartu pintar CAM. Sinkronisasi audio ke video (sink) CAM dan kartu pintar eksklusif untuk TV Anda. Jika Anda melepaskan CAM, Anda tidak akan bisa menonton saluran yang diacak lagi, yang didukung oleh CAM. Jika suara tidak sesuai dengan video pada layar, Anda dapat mengatur penundaan pada sebagian besar Sistem Home Theatre dengan pemutar disk untuk menyesuaikan suara dengan video. Menyambungkan dengan HDMI Kata kunci dan kode PIN Gunakan kabel HDMI untuk menyambungkan Sistem Home Theatre (HTS) ke TV. Anda dapat menyambungkan Soundbar Philips atau HTS dengan pemutar disk bawaan. Untuk beberapa CAM, Anda harus memasukkan kode PIN untuk menonton salurannya. Jika Anda mengatur kode PIN untuk CAM, kami sarankan Anda menggunakan kode yang sama dengan yang Anda gunakan untuk membuka kunci TV. Jika Sistem Home Theatre tidak dilengkapi sambungan HDMI ARC, tambahkan kabel audio optik (Toslink) untuk mengirimkan suara gambar TV ke Sistem Home Theatre. Untuk mengatur kode PIN untuk CAM 1 - Tekan SOURCES. 2 - Pilih jenis saluran yang CAM-nya Anda gunakan untuk Tonton TV. 3 - Tekan OPTIONS dan pilih Antarmuka Umum. 4 - Pilih operator TV CAM. Layar berikut ini muncul dari operator TV. Ikuti petunjuk pada layar untuk melihat setelan kode PIN. Sinkronisasi audio ke video (sink) Jika suara tidak sesuai dengan video pada layar, Anda dapat mengatur penundaan pada sebagian besar Sistem Home Theatre dengan pemutar disk untuk menyesuaikan suara dengan video. 6.3 Masalah pada suara HTS Sistem Home Theatre - HTS Suara dengan noise keras Jika Anda menonton video dari flash drive USB yang dicolokkan atau komputer yang tersambung, suara dari Sistem Home Theatre Anda mungkin akan terdistorsi. Noise terdengar jika file audio atau video memiliki suara DTS tetapi Sistem Home Theatre tidak memiliki pemrosesan suara DTS. Anda dapat memperbaikinya dengan mengatur Format Output Digital TV menjadi Stereo. 28

29 Tekan untuk Semua Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Digital. berkualitas tinggi. Format Output Sambungan YPbPr dapat digunakan untuk sinyal TV Definisi Tinggi (High Definition, HD). Tidak ada suara Jika Anda tidak dapat mendengar suara dari TV di Sistem Home Theatre, periksa apakah Anda telah menyambungkan kabel HDMI ke sambungan HDMI ARC di Sistem Home Theatre. Semua sambungan HDMI pada TV adalah sambungan HDMI ARC. 6.4 Smartphone dan Tablet Untuk menyambungkan smartphone atau tablet ke TV, Anda dapat menggunakan sambungan nirkabel atau kabel. Nirkabel Untuk sambungan nirkabel, pada smartphone atau tablet Anda unduhlah Aplikasi Remote Philips TV dari toko aplikasi pilihan Anda. 6.7 Kabel Apa yang Anda Perlukan Bluetooth Untuk sambungan kabel, gunakan sambungan HDMI 1 MHL di bagian belakang TV. Anda dapat menyambungkan perangkat nirkabel yang dilengkapi Bluetooth ke TV ini speaker nirkabel atau headphone. Anda juga dapat menyambungkan gamepad nirkabel dengan Bluetooth LE. 6.5 Pemutar Disk Blu-ray Untuk memutar suara TV pada speaker nirkabel, Anda harus memasangkan speaker nirkabel dengan TV. TV hanya dapat memutar suara pada satu speaker pada saat bersamaan. Gunakan kabel HDMI berkecepatan tinggi untuk menyambungkan pemutar Disk Blu-ray ke TV. Jika pemutar Disk Blu-ray dilengkapi HDMI CEC EasyLink, Anda dapat mengoperasikan pemutar dengan remote control TV. Perhatian - Sinkronisasi Audio ke Video Banyak sistem speaker Bluetooth memiliki apa yang disebut 'latensi' tinggi. Latensi tinggi berarti audio lebih lambat dibanding video, sehingga menyebabkan 'lip sync' (sinkronisasi audio dan video) tidak sinkron. Sebelum membeli sistem speaker Bluetooth nirkabel, cari tahu tentang model terbaru dan cari perangkat yang tingkat latensinya rendah. Minta saran dari toko/penjual TV Anda. Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari HDMI CEC EasyLink untuk informasi selengkapnya. 6.6 Pemutar DVD Gunakan kabel HDMI untuk menyambungkan pemutar DVD ke TV. Memasangkan Perangkat Jika pemutar DVD tersambung dengan HDMI dan dilengkapi CEC EasyLink, Anda dapat mengoperasikan pemutar dengan remote control TV. Bacalah panduan pengguna perangkat tentang informasi khusus mengenai pemasangan dan jarak nirkabel. Pastikan pengaturan Bluetooth pada TV diaktifkan. Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang EasyLink, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari EasyLink HDMI CEC. Setelah gamepad nirkabel terpasang, Anda dapat menggunakannya. Saat perangkat terpasang, Anda tidak perlu memasangkannya lagi kecuali Anda Y Pb Pr - Video Komponen adalah sambungan 29

30 melepas perangkat tersebut. 5 - Pilih Putuskan atau Lepaskan dan 6 - Pilih OK dan tekan OK untuk mengonfirmasi. 7 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Untuk memasangkan perangkat bluetooth dengan TV 1 - Aktifkan perangkat bluetooth dan tempatkan di posisi yang dapat dijangkau TV. 2 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 3 - Pilih Nirkabel dan Jaringan dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 4 - Pilih Bluetooth > Cari Perangkat Bluetooth, dan 5 - Pilih Mulai dan Ikuti petunjuk pada layar. Anda dapat memasangkan perangkat tersebut dengan TV dan TV akan menyimpan sambungan tersebut. Anda mungkin perlu untuk memutuskan pemasangan perangkat yang dipasangkan terlebih dahulu jika jumlah maksimum perangkat yang dipasangkan tercapai. 6 - Pilih jenis perangkat dan 7 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. 6.8 Headphone Anda dapat menyambungkan serangkaian headphone ke sambungan pada bagian belakang TV. Sambungan tersebut adalah jack-mini 3,5 mm. Anda dapat menyesuaikan volume headphone secara terpisah. Untuk menyesuaikan volume 1 - Tekan, pilih Volume Headphone dan 2 - Tekan panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai. 3 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. TV Anda tidak mendukung subwoofer Bluetooth dan speaker Bluetooth. Koneksi HDMI diperlukan untuk sound bar, speaker, dan perangkat audio lain. Memilih Perangkat Untuk memilih perangkat nirkabel 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Nirkabel dan Jaringan dan 3 - Pilih Bluetooth > Cari perangkat dan 4 - Dalam daftar, pilih perangkat nirkabel dan 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. 6.9 Konsol Permainan Menghapus Perangkat HDMI Anda dapat menyambungkan atau memutus sambungan perangkat Bluetooth nirkabel. Anda juga dapat menghapus perangkat Bluetooth nirkabel. Jika Anda menghapus perangkat Bluetooth, perangkat tersebut tidak akan terpasang. Untuk kualitas terbaik, sambungkan konsol permainan dengan kabel HDMI Berkecepatan tinggi ke TV. Untuk menghapus atau memutuskan sambungan perangkat nirkabel Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Nirkabel dan Jaringan dan 3 - Pilih Bluetooth > Hapus Perangkat Bluetooth dan 4 - Dalam daftar, pilih perangkat nirkabel dan 30

31 Drive USB, penginstalan. Pemasangan Sebelum Anda dapat menjeda atau merekam siaran, Anda harus menyambungkan dan memformat Hard Drive USB. Memformat akan menghapus semua file dari Hard Drive USB. 1 - Sambungkan Hard Drive USB ke salah satu sambungan USB pada TV. Jangan menyambungkan perangkat USB lainnya ke port USB lain saat memformat. 2 - Hidupkan Hard Drive USB dan TV. 3 - Jika TV disetel ke saluran TV digital, tekan (Jeda). Mencoba menjeda akan memulai pemformatan. Y Pb Pr Ikuti petunjuk pada layar. Sambungkan konsol permainan dengan kabel video komponen (Y Pb Pr) dan kabel audio L/R ke TV. Saat Hard Drive USB diformat, biarkan Hard Drive USB tersambung secara permanen Peringatan Hard Drive USB Hard Drive USB diformat secara eksklusif untuk TV ini, sehingga Anda tidak dapat menggunakan rekaman yang disimpan pada TV atau PC lainnya. Jangan menyalin atau mengubah file di Hard Drive USB dengan aplikasi PC apa pun. Hal ini akan merusak rekaman Anda. Jika Anda memformat Hard Drive USB lainnya, konten pada Hard Drive USB sebelumnya akan hilang. Hard Drive USB yang terpasang di TV Anda akan perlu diformat ulang untuk digunakan dengan komputer. Apa yang Anda Perlukan Jika Anda menyambungkan Hard Drive USB, Anda dapat menjeda atau merekam siaran TV digital (siaran DVB atau semacamnya). Ruang Disk Minimum Untuk Menjeda Untuk menjeda siaran, Anda memerlukan Hard Drive yang kompatibel dengan USB 2.0 dengan ruang disk minimal 4 GB. Untuk Merekam Untuk menjeda dan merekam siaran, Anda memerlukan ruang disk minimal 250GB. Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang cara memasang Hard Drive USB, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Hard 31

32 Memformat Mengonfigurasi Sebelum Anda dapat menjeda atau merekam siaran, Anda harus menyambungkan dan memformat Hard Drive USB. Memformat akan menghapus semua file dari Hard Drive USB. Jika Anda ingin merekam siaran dengan data Panduan TV dari Internet, Anda harus mengonfigurasi sambungan Internet terlebih dahulu sebelum memasang Hard Drive USB. Memasang keyboard Untuk memasang keyboard USB, nyalakan TV dan sambungkan keyboard USB ke salah satu sambungan USB di TV. Jika TV mendeteksi keyboard untuk pertama kali, Anda dapat memilih tata letak keyboard Anda dan menguji pemilihan Anda. Jika Anda memilih tata letak keyboard Sirilik atau Yunani terlebih dahulu, Anda dapat memilih tata letak keyboard Latin sekunder. Peringatan Hard Drive USB diformat secara eksklusif untuk TV ini, sehingga Anda tidak dapat menggunakan rekaman yang disimpan pada TV atau PC lainnya. Jangan menyalin atau mengubah file di Hard Drive USB dengan aplikasi PC apa pun. Hal ini akan merusak rekaman Anda. Jika Anda memformat Hard Drive USB lainnya, konten pada Hard Drive USB sebelumnya akan hilang. Hard Drive USB yang terpasang di TV Anda akan perlu diformat ulang untuk digunakan dengan komputer. Untuk mengubah pengaturan tata letak keyboard saat tata letak dipilih 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Umum dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Pengaturan Keyboard USB, dan tekan OK untuk memulai konfigurasi keyboard. Untuk memformat Hard Drive USB Tombol Khusus 1 - Sambungkan Hard Drive USB ke salah satu sambungan USB pada TV. Jangan menyambungkan perangkat USB lainnya ke port USB lain saat memformat. 2 - Hidupkan Hard Drive USB dan TV. 3 - Pilih Rekaman jika Anda ingin melakukan Jeda TV dan Rekaman, jika tidak, pilih Aplikasi untuk menyimpan aplikasi. Ikuti petunjuk pada layar. 4 - Semua file dan data akan dihapus setelah memformat. 5 - Saat Hard Drive USB diformat, biarkan Hard Drive USB tersambung secara permanen. Tombol untuk memasukkan teks Tombol Enter = OK Backspace = menghapus karakter sebelum kursor Tombol panah = berpindah-pindah di dalam bidang teks Untuk beralih antar tata letak keyboard, jika tata letak sekunder diatur, tekan tombol Ctrl + Bilah spasi secara bersamaan. Tombol untuk aplikasi dan halaman Internet Tab dan Shift + Tab = Selanjutnya dan Sebelumnya Home = menggulir ke bagian atas halaman End = menggulir ke bagian bawah halaman Page Up = melompati satu halaman ke atas Page Down = melompati satu halaman ke bawah + = memperbesar satu langkah - = memperkecil satu langkah = menyesuaikan halaman web dengan lebar layar Untuk informasi selengkapnya, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Jeda TV, Rekaman, atau Aplikasi Keyboard USB Menyambungkan 6.12 Flash Drive USB Sambungkan keyboard USB (tipe USB-HID) untuk memasukkan teks ke TV Anda. Anda dapat melihat foto atau memutar musik dan video dari flash drive USB yang tersambung. Gunakan salah satu sambungan USB untuk menyambungkan. Masukkan flash drive USB di salah satu sambungan USB pada TV saat TV dihidupkan. 32

33 Ultra HD asli di salah satu sambungan USB. TV akan mendeteksi flash drive dan membuka daftar yang menampilkan kontennya. Jika daftar konten tidak otomatis muncul, tekan SOURCES dan pilih USB. Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang melihat foto, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Foto, Video dan Musik. Untuk berhenti menonton konten flash drive USB, tekan EXIT atau pilih aktivitas lain. Untuk melepas flash drive USB, Anda dapat menarik keluar flash drive kapan pun Camcorder Untuk kualitas terbaik, sambungkan konsol permainan dengan kabel HDMI Berkecepatan tinggi ke TV. Ultra HD pada USB Anda dapat melihat foto dengan resolusi Ultra HD dari perangkat USB atau flash drive yang tersambung. TV akan mengurangi resolusi ke Ultra HD jika resolusi foto lebih tinggi. Anda tidak dapat memutar video Ultra HD asli di salah satu sambungan USB. Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang menonton atau memutar konten dari flash drive USB, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Foto, Video dan Musik Kamera Foto Untuk melihat foto yang tersimpan di kamera foto digital, Anda dapat menyambungkan kamera langsung ke TV HDMI Gunakan salah satu sambungan USB pada TV untuk menyambungkan. Nyalakan kamera setelah disambungkan. Untuk kualitas terbaik, sambungkan konsol permainan dengan kabel HDMI Berkecepatan tinggi ke TV. Jika daftar konten tidak otomatis muncul, tekan SOURCES dan pilih USB. Kamera Anda mungkin perlu diatur untuk mentransfer kontennya dengan PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol/Protokol Transfer Gambar). Baca buku petunjuk kamera foto digital. Ultra HD pada USB Anda dapat melihat foto dengan resolusi Ultra HD dari perangkat USB atau flash drive yang tersambung. TV akan mengurangi resolusi ke Ultra HD jika resolusi foto lebih tinggi. Anda tidak dapat memutar video 33

34 6.16 Komputer Menyambungkan Anda dapat menyambungkan komputer Anda ke TV dan menggunakan TV sebagai monitor PC. Dengan HDMI Gunakan kabel HDMI untuk menyambungkan komputer ke TV. Dengan DVI ke HDMI Alternatifnya, Anda dapat menggunakan adaptor DVI ke HDMI (dijual terpisah) untuk menyambungkan PC ke HDMI dan kabel audio L/R (jack mini 3,5 mm) ke AUDIO IN L/R di bagian belakang TV. Pengaturan Ideal Jika Anda menyambungkan komputer, sebaiknya Anda menamai sambungan tersebut, pada komputer yang tersambung, dengan nama jenis perangkat yang tepat di menu Sumber. Jika Anda kemudian beralih ke Komputer dalam menu Sumber, TV diatur ke pengaturan Komputer ideal secara otomatis. Untuk mengatur TV ke pengaturan ideal 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Gambar dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Lanjutan > Komputer, dan 4 - Pilih Aktif atau Tidak Aktif, dan 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. 34

35 7 jar. > WPS. Menyambungkan TV Android Anda Jika router Anda memiliki WPS, Anda dapat langsung menyambungkannya ke router tanpa memindai jaringan. Jika Anda memiliki perangkat pada jaringan nirkabel yang menggunakan sistem enkripsi keamanan WEP, Anda tidak dapat menggunakan WPS Datangi router, tekan tombol WPS, dan kembali lagi ke TV dalam 2 menit. 2 - Pilih Sambungkan untuk membuat sambungan. 3 - Ketika sambungan berhasil, akan muncul sebuah pesan. Jaringan dan Internet Jaringan Rumah Untuk menikmati kemampuan TV Android Philips sepenuhnya, TV Anda harus tersambung ke internet. Membuat Sambungan - WPS dengan kode PIN Sambungkan TV ke jaringan rumah dengan sambungan Internet berkecepatan tinggi. Anda dapat menghubungkan TV Anda secara nirkabel atau berkabel ke router jaringan Anda. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Menyambung ke jar. > WPS dengan kode PIN. Jika router Anda memiliki WPS dengan kode PIN, Anda dapat langsung menyambungkannya ke router tanpa memindai jaringan. Jika Anda memiliki perangkat pada jaringan nirkabel yang menggunakan sistem enkripsi keamanan WEP, Anda tidak dapat menggunakan WPS. Menyambung ke Jaringan Sambungan Nirkabel Apa yang Anda Perlukan 1 - Tulis PIN 8-digit yang ditampilkan pada layar dan masukkan ke perangkat lunak router di PC Anda. Baca panduan router tentang tempat untuk memasukkan kode PIN di perangkat lunak router. 2 - Pilih Sambungkan untuk membuat sambungan. 3 - Ketika sambungan berhasil, akan muncul sebuah pesan. Untuk menyambungkan TV ke Internet secara nirkabel, Anda memerlukan router Wi-Fi yang tersambung ke Internet. Gunakan sambungan internet berkecepatan tinggi (broadband). Membuat Sambungan Permasalahan Membuat Sambungan - Nirkabel Jaringan nirkabel tidak ditemukan atau terdistorsi Oven microwave, telepon DECT, atau perangkat WiFi b/g/n lain di sekitar Anda mungkin mengganggu jaringan nirkabel. Pastikan firewall di jaringan Anda memungkinkan akses ke sambungan nirkabel TV. Jika jaringan nirkabel tidak bekerja dengan tepat di rumah Anda, coba penginstalan jaringan berkabel. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Menyambung ke Jar. > Nirkabel. 1 - Di daftar hasil temuan jaringan, pilih jaringan nirkabel Anda. Jika jaringan tidak ada di daftar karena nama jaringan disembunyikan (Anda mematikan siaran SSID router), pilih Tambah Jaringan Baru untuk memasukkan sendiri nama jaringan Anda. 2 - Bergantung pada jenis router yang digunakan, masukkan kunci enkripsi Anda - WEP, WPA, atau WPA2. Jika Anda memasukkan kunci enkripsi untuk jaringan ini sebelumnya, Anda dapat memilih OK untuk segera membuat sambungan. 3 - Ketika sambungan berhasil, akan muncul sebuah pesan. Internet tidak berfungsi Jika sambungan ke router OK, periksa sambungan router ke Internet. PC dan sambungan Internet lambat Lihat informasi tentang jangkauan dalam ruangan, kecepatan transfer, dan faktor kualitas sinyal lainnya di buku petunjuk router nirkabel Anda. Gunakan sambungan Internet berkecepatan tinggi (broadband) untuk router Anda. DHCP Jika sambungan gagal, Anda dapat memeriksa pengaturan DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) di router. DHCP harus diaktifkan. Membuat Sambungan - WPS (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Menyambung ke 35

36 Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Penyelesaian Masalah untuk informasi selengkapnya. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Jaringan > Kabel atau WiFi > Konfigurasi Jaringan > IP Statis. Jika Anda pengguna mahir dan ingin menginstal jaringan dengan alamat IP Statis, atur TV ke IP Statis. Sambungan Berkabel Apa yang Anda Perlukan Konfigurasi Jaringan - Konfigurasi IP Statis Untuk menyambungkan TV ke Internet, Anda memerlukan router jaringan yang tersambung ke Internet. Gunakan sambungan internet berkecepatan tinggi (broadband). (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Jaringan > Kabel atau WiFi > Konfigurasi Jaringan > Konfigurasi IP Statis. 1 - Pilih Konfigurasi IP Statis dan lakukan konfigurasi sambungan. 2 - Anda dapat menetapkan angka untuk Alamat IP, Netmask, Gateway, DNS 1, atau DNS 2. Menyalakan dengan Wi-Fi (WoWLAN) (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Aktifkan dengan Wi-Fi (WoWLAN). Anda dapat menyalakan TV ini dari smartphone atau tablet jika status TV adalah Siaga. Pengaturan Aktifkan dengan Wi-Fi (WoWLAN) harus dihidupkan. Membuat Sambungan Mengaktifkan sambungan Wi-Fi (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Jaringan > Kabel atau WiFi > Menyambung ke Jar. > Brkabel. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Jaringan > Kabel atau WiFi > Wi-Fi On/Off. 1 - Sambungkan router ke TV dengan kabel jaringan (Kabel ethernet). 2 - Pastikan router dihidupkan. 3 - TV akan terus-terus mencari sambungan jaringan. 4 - Ketika sambungan berhasil, akan muncul sebuah pesan. Anda dapat mengaktifkan atau menonaktifkan sambungan Wi-Fi pada TV Anda. Digital Media Renderer - DMR Jika sambungan gagal, Anda dapat memeriksa pengaturan DHCP router. DHCP harus diaktifkan. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Jaringan > Kabel atau WiFi > Digital Media Renderer - DMR. Untuk memenuhi peraturan EMC, gunakan Cat FTP berpelindung. Kabel ethernet 5E. Jika file media Anda tidak dapat diputar di TV, pastikan Digital Media Renderer telah diaktifkan. Berdasarkan pengaturan pabrik, DMR sudah diaktifkan. Pengaturan Jaringan Melihat Pengaturan Jaringan Nama Jaringan TV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Jaringan > Kabel atau WiFi > Lihat pengaturan jaringan. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Jaringan > Kabel atau WiFi > Nama Jaringan TV. Anda dapat melihat semua pengaturan jaringan saat ini di sini. Alamat IP dan MAC, kekuatan sinyal, kecepatan, metode enkripsi, dll. Jika Anda memiliki lebih dari satu TV di jaringan rumah, Anda dapat memberikan nama khusus untuk TV tersebut. Konfigurasi Jaringan - IP Statis 36

37 Menghapus Memori Internet Pengaturan Android (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Jaringan > Kabel atau WiFi > Hapus Memori Internet. Anda dapat mengatur atau melihat beberapa pengaturan atau informasi khusus Android. Anda dapat menemukan daftar aplikasi yang terinstal pada TV dan ruang penyimpanan yang dibutuhkan. Anda dapat mengatur bahasa yang ingin Anda gunakan dengan Pencarian Suara. Anda dapat mengonfigurasi keyboard pada layar atau memungkinkan aplikasi menggunakan lokasi Anda. Jelajahi pengaturan Android lain. Anda dapat mengunjungi untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang pengaturan ini. Dengan Hapus Memori Internet, Anda menghapus pengaturan pendaftaran server Philips dan peringkat orang tua, login aplikasi toko video Anda, semua favorit Galeri Aplikasi Philips, penanda dan riwayat Internet. Aplikasi Interactive MHEG juga dapat menyimpan 'cookie', di TV Anda. File-file ini juga akan dihapus. Untuk membuka pengaturan ini Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Android, dan 3 - Jelajahi pengaturan Android lain. 4 - Tekan BACK jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Akun Google Sign In Untuk menikmati kemampuan TV Android Philips sepenuhnya, Anda dapat sign in ke Google dengan Akun Google. 7.3 Dengan sign in, Anda dapat bermain permainan favorit Anda di seluruh ponsel, tablet, dan TV. Anda juga akan mendapatkan rekomendasi video dan musik yang disesuaikan di layar utama TV serta akses ke Youtube, Google Play, dan aplikasi lainnya. Galeri Aplikasi Philips Aplikasi Philips Sambungkan TV ke Internet untuk menikmati aplikasi yang dipilih oleh Philips. Aplikasi Galeri Aplikasi Philips dibuat khusus untuk TV. Mengunduh dan menginstal aplikasi dari Galeri Aplikasi tidak dikenai biaya. Sign In Gunakan Akun Google yang sudah ada untuk sign in ke Google di TV. Akun Google terdiri dari alamat dan kata sandi. Jika Anda belum memiliki Akun Google, gunakan komputer atau tablet Anda untuk membuatnya (accounts.google.com). Untuk memainkan permainan dengan Google Play, Anda memerlukan profil Google+. Jika Anda tidak sign in selama pemasangan TV pertama kali, Anda dapat selalu masuk di lain waktu. Koleksi Galeri Aplikasi Philips aplikasi mungkin berbeda pada setiap negara atau wilayah. Ketentuan Penggunaan Untuk sign in setelah Anda melakukan pemasangan TV... Untuk menginstal dan menggunakan aplikasi Galeri Aplikasi Philips, Anda harus menyetujui Ketentuan Penggunaan. Jika Anda tidak menyetujui ketentuan ini selama pemasangan TV pertama, Anda bisa selalu menyetujuinya di lain waktu. Saat Anda menyetujui Ketentuan Penggunaan, beberapa aplikasi akan segera tersedia dan Anda dapat menelusuri Galeri Aplikasi Philips untuk menginstal aplikasi lain. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Android dan 3 - Tekan (turun) dan pilih Pribadi > Tambah akun dan 4 - Tekan OK pada SIGN IN. 5 - Dengan keyboard pada layar, masukkan alamat Anda dan 6 - Masuk kata sandi Anda dan tekan tombol OK kecil yang sama untuk sign in. 7 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Untuk menyetujui Ketentuan Penggunaan setelah Anda melakukan pemasangan TV Tekan HOME dan pilih Koleksi Philips > Galeri Aplikasi dan tekan OK untuk membuka Galeri Aplikasi. 2 - Anda dapat memilih Ketentuan Penggunaan, lalu tekan OK untuk membaca. 3 - Pilih Terima dan Anda tidak dapat membatalkan persetujuan ini. Jika Anda ingin masuk dengan Akun Google yang lain, keluarlah terlebih dahulu, lalu masuklah dengan akun yang lain. 37

38 4 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Pengaturan Privasi Anda dapat mengatur beberapa pengaturan privasi untuk aplikasi Galeri Aplikasi Philips. Anda dapat mengizinkan statistik teknis untuk dikirim ke Philips. Anda dapat mengizinkan rekomendasi pribadi. Anda dapat mengizinkan cookie. Anda dapat mengaktifkan Penguncian Anak untuk aplikasi dengan peringkat usia 18+. Untuk mengatur pengaturan privasi Galeri Aplikasi Philips 1 - Tekan HOME dan pilih Koleksi Philips > Galeri Aplikasi dan tekan OK untuk membuka Galeri Aplikasi. 2 - Anda dapat memilih Kebijakan Privasi, lalu 3 - Pilih masing-masing pengaturan dan tekan OK untuk mengizinkan atau tidak mengizinkan. Anda dapat membaca tentang masing-masing pengaturan secara terperinci. 4 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. 38

39 Play Movies & TV dan 3 - Pilih film atau tayangan TV dari pustaka Anda di aplikasi, pilih judul dan 4 - Anda dapat menggunakan tombol (hentikan), (jeda), (putar mundur) atau (maju cepat) pada remote control. 5 - Untuk menghentikan aplikasi Film & TV, tekan BACK berulang kali atau tekan EXIT. 8 Aplikasi 8.1 Tentang Aplikasi Anda dapat menemukan semua aplikasi yang terinstal di bagian Aplikasi menu Awal. Beberapa produk dan fitur Google Play tidak tersedia di semua negara. Seperti aplikasi di smartphone atau tablet, aplikasi di TV Anda menawarkan fungsi khusus agar pengalaman menikmati TV makin lengkap. Aplikasi seperti YouTube, permainan, toko video, atau prakiraan cuaca (a.o.). Anda dapat menggunakan aplikasi Internet untuk menjelajahi Internet. Dapatkan informasi selengkapnya di support.google.com/androidtv Musik Aplikasi bisa berasal dari Galeri Aplikasi Philips atau Google Play Store. Untuk membantu Anda memulai, beberapa aplikasi praktis telah diinstal sebelumnya di TV Anda. Dengan Google Play Music, Anda dapat memutar musik favorit Anda di TV. Dengan Google Play Music, Anda dapat membeli musik baru di komputer atau perangkat seluler Anda. Atau, di TV, Anda dapat mendaftar untuk Semua Akses, langganan Google Play Music. Atau, Anda dapat memutar musik yang sudah Anda miliki, yang tersimpan di komputer. Untuk menginstal aplikasi dari Galeri Aplikasi Philips atau Google Play Store, TV harus tersambung ke Internet. Anda harus menyetujui Ketentuan Penggunaan untuk menggunakan aplikasi dari Galeri Aplikasi. Anda harus sign in dengan Akun Google untuk menggunakan aplikasi Google Play dan Google Play Store. Apa yang Anda Perlukan TV Anda harus tersambung dengan Internet Anda harus sign in dengan Akun Google di TV menambahkan kartu kredit ke Akun Google Anda untuk berlangganan musik 8.2 Google Play Untuk memulai Google Play Music Movies and TV 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Google Play Movies dan 3 - Pilih musik yang Anda inginkan dan 4 - Untuk menghentikan aplikasi Musik, tekan BACK berulang kali atau tekan EXIT. Dengan Google Play Movies & TV, Anda dapat menyewa atau membeli film dan tayangan TV untuk ditonton di TV. Apa yang Anda Perlukan TV Anda harus tersambung dengan Internet Anda harus sign in dengan Akun Google di TV menambahkan kartu kredit ke Akun Google untuk membeli film atau tayangan TV Beberapa produk dan fitur Google Play tidak tersedia di semua negara. Dapatkan informasi selengkapnya di support.google.com/androidtv Untuk menyewa atau membeli film atau tayangan TV 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Google Play Movies & TV dan 3 - Pilih film atau tayangan TV dan 4 - Pilih pembelian yang Anda inginkan dan Anda akan dibawa ke prosedur pembelian. Permainan Dengan Google Play Games, Anda dapat bermain permainan di TV. Online atau offline. Untuk menonton film atau tayangan TV yang disewa atau dibeli Anda dapat melihat apa yang teman Anda mainkan saat ini atau Anda dapat bergabung di permainan dan berkompetisi. Anda dapat melacak pencapaian Anda atau memulai dari titik Anda keluar sebelumnya. 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Google Apa yang Anda Perlukan TV Anda harus tersambung dengan Internet 39

40 Anda harus sign in dengan Akun Google di TV menambahkan kartu kredit ke Akun Google Anda untuk membeli permainan baru OK. 4 - Pilih tingkat kedewasaan yang Anda inginkan. 5 - Jika diminta, masukkan kode PIN. 6 - Untuk menutup aplikasi Google Play Store, tekan BACK berulang kali atau tekan EXIT. Mulai aplikasi Google Play Games untuk memilih dan menginstal aplikasi permainan baru di TV Anda. Beberapa permainan tidak dikenai biaya. Pesan muncul jika permainan tertentu memerlukan gamepad untuk bermain permainan. Beberapa produk dan fitur Google Play tidak tersedia di semua negara. Dapatkan informasi selengkapnya di support.google.com/androidtv Untuk memulai dan menghentikan Google Play Game 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Google Play Games dan 3 - Pilih permainan yang akan dimainkan atau pilih permainan baru untuk diinstal dan 4 - Jika selesai, tekan BACK berulang kali atau tekan EXIT atau hentikan aplikasi dengan tombol keluar/henti khususnya. Pembayaran Untuk melakukan pembayaran pada Google Play di TV, Anda harus menambahkan formulir pembayaran kartu kredit (di luar Amerika Serikat) - ke Akun Google Anda. Saat Anda membeli film atau tayangan TV, Anda akan dikenai biaya pada kartu kredit ini. Untuk menambahkan kartu kredit Permainan yang Anda instal juga akan muncul di baris Permainan di menu Awal 1 - Di komputer Anda, kunjungi ke accounts.google.com dan sign in dengan Akun Google yang akan Anda gunakan dengan Google Play di TV. 2 - Kunjungi wallet.google.com untuk menambahkan kartu Akun Google Anda. 3 - Masukkan data kartu kredit dan terima syarat dan ketentuan. Beberapa produk dan fitur Google Play tidak tersedia di semua negara. Dapatkan informasi selengkapnya di support.google.com/androidtv Google Play Store Dari Google Play Store, Anda dapat mengunduh dan menginstal aplikasi baru. Beberapa aplikasi tidak dikenai biaya. 8.3 Apa yang Anda Perlukan TV Anda harus tersambung dengan Internet Anda harus sign in dengan Akun Google di TV menambahkan kartu kredit ke Akun Google Anda untuk membeli aplikasi Sambungkan TV ke Internet untuk menikmati aplikasi yang dipilih oleh Philips. Aplikasi ini khusus dibuat untuk TV. Galeri Aplikasi Philips menawarkan berbagai aplikasi. Untuk beberapa negara, Anda dapat menginstal aplikasi Toko video lokal atau aplikasi dari stasiun penyiaran TV di negara Anda. Aplikasi yang disebut terakhir bisa menawarkan layanan Catch-Up TV. Mengunduh dan menginstal aplikasi dari Galeri Aplikasi tidak dikenai biaya. Galeri Aplikasi Untuk menginstal aplikasi baru 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Google Play Store dan 3 - Pilih aplikasi yang ingin Anda instal dan 4 - Untuk menutup aplikasi Google Play Store, tekan BACK berulang kali atau tekan EXIT. Koleksi Galeri Aplikasi Philips aplikasi mungkin berbeda pada setiap negara atau wilayah. Beberapa aplikasi Galeri Aplikasi telah diinstal sebelumnya pada TV Anda. Untuk menginstal aplikasi lainnya dari Galeri Aplikasi, Anda akan diminta untuk menyetujui Ketentuan Penggunaan. Anda dapat mengatur Pengaturan Privasi berdasarkan preferensi Anda. Kontrol orang tua Di Google Play Store, Anda dapat menyembunyikan aplikasi sesuai dengan kedewasaan pengguna/pembeli. Anda perlu memasukkan kode PIN untuk memilih atau mengubah tingkat kedewasaan. Untuk menginstal aplikasi dari Galeri Aplikasi Untuk mengatur kontrol orang tua 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Koleksi Philips > Galeri Aplikasi dan 3 - Pilih ikon aplikasi, lalu 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Google Play Store dan 3 - Pilih Pengaturan > Kontrol orang tua dan tekan 40

41 4 - Pilih Instal dan tekan 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Penguncian Anak Kunci Aplikasi dan 3 - Pilih Aktif dan tekan OK. 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. OK. 8.4 Memulai atau Menghentikan Aplikasi Untuk informasi lainnya, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Penguncian Anak, Kunci Aplikasi untuk informasi selengkapnya. Anda dapat memulai aplikasi dari menu Awal. Untuk memulai aplikasi 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah ke Aplikasi dan pilih jenis aplikasi yang Anda inginkan dan 3 - Untuk menghentikan aplikasi, tekan BACK atau tekan EXIT atau hentikan aplikasi dengan tombol keluar/henti khususnya. Profil Terbatas Tentang Profil Terbatas Mengunci Aplikasi Anda dapat membatasi penggunaan aplikasi tertentu dengan mengalihkan TV ke profil terbatas. Menu Awal hanya akan menampilkan aplikasi yang Anda izinkan. Anda memerlukan kode PIN untuk keluar dari profil terbatas. Tentang Kunci Aplikasi Dengan TV yang dialihkan ke profil terbatas, Anda tidak dapat 8.5 Menemukan atau membuka aplikasi yang ditandai sebagai Tidak diizinkan Mengakses Google Play Store Membeli melalui Google Play Movies & TV, dan Google Play Games Menggunakan aplikasi pihak ketiga yang tidak menggunakan sign-in Google Anda dapat mengunci aplikasi yang tidak cocok untuk anak-anak. Anda dapat mengunci aplikasi dengan rating 18+ dari Galeri Aplikasi atau menyiapkan profil terbatas di menu Awal. 18+ Kunci aplikasi 18+ akan meminta kode PIN saat Anda mencoba memulai aplikasi dengan rating 18+. Kunci ini hanya berlaku untuk aplikasi dengan rating 18+ dari Galeri Aplikasi Philips. Dengan TV yang dialihkan ke profil terbatas, Anda dapat Melihat konten yang sudah disewa atau dibeli dari Google Play Movies & TV Bermain permainan yang sudah dibeli dan dipasang dari Google Play Games Mengakses pengaturan berikut ini: Jaringan Wi-Fi, Ucapan dan Aksesibilitas Menambah aksesori Bluetooth Profil terbatas Anda dapat menyiapkan profil terbatas untuk menu Awal di mana yang tersedia hanyalah aplikasi yang Anda izinkan. Anda perlu memasukan kode PIN untuk menyiapkan dan mengaktifkan profil terbatas. Google Play Store - Kedewasaan Akun Google pada TV akan tetap log in. Penggunaan profil terbatas tidak mengubah Akun Google. Di Google Play Store, Anda dapat menyembunyikan aplikasi sesuai dengan kedewasaan pengguna/pembeli. Anda perlu memasukkan kode PIN untuk memilih atau mengubah tingkat kedewasaan. Tingkat kedewasaan akan menentukan aplikasi mana yang tersedia untuk diinstal. Penyiapan Untuk menyiapkan profil terbatas 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Android, dan 3 - Tekan (turun) dan pilih Pribadi > Keamanan & batasan dan 4 - Pilih Profil Terbatas dan 5 - Pilih Pengaturan, dan 6 - Masukkan kode PIN dengan remote control. 7 - Pilih Aplikasi yang diizinkan, dan 8 - Pada daftar aplikasi yang tersedia, pilih salah Mengunci aplikasi dengan rating 18+ Anda dapat mengunci aplikasi dengan rating 18+ dari Galeri Aplikasi Philips. Pengaturan ini mengontrol pengaturan 18+ di Pengaturan Privasi Galeri Aplikasi Philips. Untuk mengunci aplikasi dengan rating

42 aplikasi dan tekan OK untuk mengizinkan atau tidak mengizinkan aplikasi ini. 9 - Tekan BACK untuk mundur satu langkah dan tekan EXIT untuk menutup menu. 8.7 Penyimpanan Anda dapat melihat seberapa banyak ruang penyimpanan - memori TV internal - yang Anda gunakan untuk aplikasi, video, musik Anda, dll. Anda dapat melihat berapa banyak ruang kosong yang masih tersedia untuk menginstal aplikasi baru. Periksa ruang penyimpanan jika aplikasi mulai terasa berjalan lambat atau jika aplikasi bermasalah. Sekarang, Anda dapat memasukkan profil terbatas. Dengan kode PIN, Anda selalu dapat mengubah kode PIN atau mengedit daftar aplikasi yang diizinkan atau yang tidak diizinkan. Untuk mengetahui seberapa banyak penyimpanan yang Anda gunakan Masuk Untuk masuk ke (beralih ke) profil terbatas 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Android dan 3 - Pilih Perangkat > Penyimpanan & reset dan 4 - Lihat penggunaan ruang penyimpanan memori TV. 5 - Tekan BACK untuk mundur satu langkah dan tekan EXIT untuk menutup menu. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Android dan 3 - Tekan (turun) dan pilih Pribadi > Keamanan & batasan dan 4 - Pilih Masuk profil terbatas dan 5 - Masukkan kode PIN dengan remote control. 6 - Tekan BACK untuk mundur satu langkah dan tekan EXIT untuk menutup menu. Hard Drive USB Anda dapat melihat saat profil terbatas dimasukkan jika ikon muncul di layar Awal. Gulir ke bawah ke Pengaturan dan gulir ke kanan jauh. Jika Anda menyambungkan Hard Drive USB, Anda dapat menggunakan drive untuk memperbesar memori TV untuk menyimpan lebih banyak aplikasi. Izinkan Hard Drive USB untuk digunakan sebagai memori TV tambahan selama proses pemformatan. TV akan mencoba menyimpan aplikasi baru di Hard Drive USB terlebih dahulu. Beberapa aplikasi tidak mengizinkan untuk disimpan di Hard Drive USB. Keluar Untuk keluar dari profil terbatas 1 - Tekan HOME, gulir ke bawah ke Pengaturan dan gulir ke kanan jauh. 2 - Pilih Profil Terbatas dan 3 - Pilih Keluar dari profil terbatas dan 4 - Masukkan kode PIN. TV akan keluar dari profil terbatas. Untuk memigrasi data Anda yang sudah ada, buka Semua Pengaturan > Pengaturan Android > Prgkt> Penyimpanan & atur ulang lalu pilih Hard Drive USB. 8.6 Mengelola Aplikasi Jika Anda menghentikan aplikasi dan kembali ke menu Awal, aplikasi tidak benar-benar berhenti. Aplikasi masih berjalan di latar belakang agar siap sedia saat Anda memulainya lagi. Agar berjalan dengan lancar, kebanyakan aplikasi perlu menyimpan beberapa data di memori cache TV. Mungkin sebaiknya hentikan aplikasi sepenuhnya atau bersihkan data cache aplikasi tertentu guna mengoptimalkan keseluruhan kinerja aplikasi dan agar penggunaan memori tetap rendah di TV Android Anda. Selain itu, menghapus instalan aplikasi yang tidak Anda gunakan lagi adalah tindakan terbaik. 42

43 9 Internet 9.1 Memulai Internet Anda bisa menelusuri Internet di TV Anda. Anda dapat menampilkan semua situs web di Internet, tetapi kebanyakan situs tersebut tidak disiapkan untuk layar TV. Beberapa plug-in (misalnya untuk menampilkan halaman atau video) tidak tersedia pada TV Anda. Anda tidak bisa mengirimkan atau mengunduh file. Halaman Internet ditampilkan satu per satu dalam layar penuh. Untuk memulai browser Internet 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Internet dan 3 - Masukkan alamat Internet dan pilih, 4 - Untuk menutup Internet, tekan HOME atau EXIT. 9.2 Opsi tentang Internet Beberapa ekstra tersedia untuk Internet. Untuk membuka ekstra 1 - Saat situs web dibuka, tekan OPTIONS. 2 - Pilih salah satu item dan Tambahkan panggilan cepat: Untuk memasukkan alamat Internet baru. Tambahkan ke penanda: Tambahkan halaman sebagai penanda Keamanan halaman: Untuk melihat tingkat keamanan halaman saat ini. Tab pribadi baru: Buka tab pribadi baru, dan lakukan penelusuran pribadi Pengaturan: Pengaturan untuk Zoom, Ukuran teks, Mode aksesibilitas, Selalu tampilkan bilah menu, dan hapus riwayat (penelusuran) Bantuan: Informasi browser Internet Keluar dari browser Internet: Tutup browser Internet 43

44 10 Menu TV 10.1 Tentang Menu TV Jika TV tidak dapat tersambung dengan Internet, Anda dapat menggunakan Menu TV sebagai menu Awal Anda. Di Menu TV, Anda akan menemukan setiap fungsi TV Membuka Menu TV Untuk membuka menu TV dan membuka item 1 - Tekan untuk membuka Menu TV. 2 - Pilih item dan tekan OK untuk membuka atau memulainya. 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu TV tanpa memulai apa pun. 44

45 Buka opsi ini untuk melihat informasi tentang perangkat yang tersambung. 11 Sumber Nama dan Jenis Perangkat Beralih ke perangkat Saat Anda menyambungkan perangkat baru ke TV dan TV mendeteksi perangkat, Anda dapat menetapkan ikon yang sesuai dengan jenis perangkat. Jika Anda menyambungkan perangkat dengan kabel HDMI dan HDMI CEC, TV mendeteksi jenis perangkat secara otomatis dan perangkat diberi ikon yang sesuai. Dari daftar Sumber, Anda dapat beralih ke setiap perangkat yang tersambung. Anda dapat beralih ke tuner untuk menonton TV, membuka konten Flash Drive USB yang tersambung atau melihat rekaman yang Anda buat di Hard Drive USB yang tersambung. Anda dapat beralih ke perangkat Anda yang tersambung untuk menonton programnya, penerima digital atau pemutar Disk Blu-ray. Jenis perangkat menentukan gaya gambar dan suara, nilai resolusi, pengaturan tertentu atau posisi dalam menu Sumber. Anda tidak perlu khawatir tentang pengaturan yang ideal. Untuk beralih ke perangkat yang tersambung 1 - Tekan SOURCES untuk membuka menu Sumber. 2 - Pilih salah satu item di daftar sumber dan TV akan menampilkan program atau konten perangkat. 3 - Tekan SOURCES lagi untuk menutup menu. Mengubah Nama atau Mengubah Jenis Anda dapat selalu mengubah nama atau mengubah jenis perangkat yang tersambung. Cari ikon di sebelah kanan nama perangkat di menu Sumber. Beberapa sumber input TV tidak mengizinkan pengubahan nama. Putar Sekali-Sentuh Dengan TV dalam kondisi siaga, Anda dapat menyalakan pemutar disk dengan remote control TV Anda. Untuk menyalakan pemutar disk dan TV dari kondisi siaga dan segera mulai memutar disk, tekan (putar) pada remote control TV. Perangkat harus disambungkan dengan kabel HDMI dan TV serta perangkat harus dilengkapi HDMI CEC yang diaktifkan. Untuk mengubah jenis perangkat 1 - Pilih perangkat di menu Sumber. 2 - Tekan (kanan) untuk memilih ikon dan 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menyembunyikan keyboard pada layar. 4 - Tekan (turun) untuk menemukan semua jenis perangkat yang tersedia. Pilih jenis yang Anda inginkan dan Jika Anda ingin mereset jenis perangkat ke jenis konektor aslinya, pilih Reset dan 6 - Pilih Tutup dan tekan OK untuk menutup menu ini. Opsi untuk Input TV Beberapa perangkat input TV menawarkan pengaturan tertentu. Untuk mengubah nama perangkat Untuk mengatur opsi untuk input TV tertentu 1 - Pilih perangkat di menu Sumber. 2 - Tekan (kanan) untuk memilih ikon dan 3 - Gunakan Keyboard pada layar untuk menghapus nama saat ini dan memasukkan nama baru. Tekan untuk mengonfirmasi. 4 - Tekan BACK untuk menyembunyikan keyboard pada layar. 5 - Jika Anda ingin mereset nama perangkat ke nama konektor aslinya, pilih Reset dan 6 - Pilih Tutup dan tekan OK untuk menutup menu ini. 1 - Tekan SOURCES. 2 - Pilih input TV di daftar dan 3 - Tekan OPTIONS. Anda dapat mengatur opsi untuk input TV yang dipilih di sini. 4 - Tekan OPTIONS lagi untuk menutup menu Opsi. Opsi yang memungkinkan Kontrol Dengan opsi ini, Anda dapat mengoperasikan perangkat yang tersambung dengan remote control TV. Perangkat harus disambungkan dengan kabel HDMI dan TV serta perangkat harus dilengkapi HDMI CEC yang diaktifkan. Info Perangkat 45

46 11.4 Memindai Ulang Sambungan Anda dapat memindai kembali semua sambungan TV untuk memperbarui menu Sumber dengan perangkat yang baru saja tersambung. Untuk memindai kembali sambungan 1 - Tekan SOURCES untuk membuka menu Sumber. 2 - Tekan (naik) untuk memilih ikon di kanan atas menu Sumber. 3 - Tekan OK untuk mulai memindai sambungan. Perangkat yang baru disambungkan akan ditambahkan ke menu Sumber. 46

47 12 Menghapus Perangkat Jaringan Untuk informasi selengkapnya, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata Kunci dan cari Bluetooth, Hapus perangkat untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang cara memutus pemasangan (menghapus) perangkat Bluetooth nirkabel Jaringan Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata Kunci dan cari Jaringan, untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang menyambungkan TV ke jaringan. Bluetooth Aktif atau Tidak Aktif Untuk menyambungkan perangkat Bluetooth nirkabel, pastikan Bluetooth diaktifkan Untuk mengaktifkan Bluetooth Bluetooth 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Nirkabel dan Jaringan dan 3 - Pilih Bluetooth > Bluetooth Aktif/Tidak Aktif dan 4 - Pilih Aktif atau Tidak Aktif dan 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Apa yang Anda Perlukan Anda dapat menyambungkan perangkat nirkabel dengan Bluetooth ke TV ini. Untuk memutar suara TV pada speaker nirkabel, Anda harus memasangkan speaker nirkabel dengan TV. TV hanya dapat memutar suara pada satu speaker pada saat bersamaan. Perhatian - Sinkronisasi Audio ke Video Banyak sistem speaker Bluetooth memiliki apa yang disebut 'latensi' tinggi. Latensi tinggi berarti audio lebih lambat dibanding video, sehingga menyebabkan 'lip sync' (sinkronisasi audio dan video) tidak sinkron. Sebelum membeli sistem speaker Bluetooth nirkabel, cari tahu tentang model terbaru dan cari perangkat yang tingkat latensinya rendah. Minta saran dari toko/penjual TV Anda. Memasangkan Perangkat Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata Kunci dan cari Bluetooth, Pemasangan untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang memasangkan perangkat nirkabel. Memilih Perangkat Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata Kunci dan cari Bluetooth, Pilih perangkat untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang cara memilih speaker nirkabel. 47

48 13 Warna, Kontras, Ketajaman, Kecerahan Pengaturan Menyesuaikan warna gambar 13.1 (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Warna. Gambar Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai saturasi warna gambar. Pengaturan Gambar Gaya Gambar Menyesuaikan kontras gambar Memilih gaya (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Kontras. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Gaya gambar. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai kontras gambar. Untuk memudahkan penyesuaian gambar, Anda dapat memilih preset gaya gambar. Anda dapat menurunkan nilai kontras untuk mengurangi konsumsi daya. Pribadi - Preferensi gambar yang Anda atur selama penyalaan pertama. Tajam - Ideal untuk tampilan siang hari Alami - Pengaturan gambar alami Standar - Pengaturan yang paling hemat energi - Pengaturan pabrik Film - Ideal untuk menonton film Permainan - Ideal untuk memainkan permainan Monitor - Ideal untuk tampilan PC Siang - Untuk Kalibrasi ISF Malam - Untuk Kalibrasi ISF Menyesuaikan ketajaman gambar (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Ketajaman. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai ketajaman gambar. Menyesuaikan kecerahan Ketika TV menerima sinyal HDR, pilih gaya gambar berikut: (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Kecerahan. HDR Pribadi HDR Tajam HDR Alami HDR Film HDR Permainan Siang - Untuk Kalibrasi ISF Malam - Untuk Kalibrasi ISF Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk mengatur tingkat kecerahan sinyal gambar. Catatan: Pengaturan kecerahan jauh melampaui nilai referensi (50) dapat menyebabkan kontras yang lebih rendah. Mengembalikan Gaya 1 - Pilih gaya gambar yang ingin Anda kembalikan. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Kmblkn gaya, dan Gaya dikembalikan. Pengaturan Gambar Lanjutan Pengaturan Warna Pengaturan Warna Lanjutan Menyesuaikan Gaya (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Warna. Setiap gambar yang Anda sesuaikan, seperti Warna atau Kontras, akan disimpan di dalam Gaya Gambar yang saat ini dipilih. Ini memungkinkan Anda menyesuaikan setiap gaya. Hanya gaya Pribadi yang dapat menyimpan pengaturannya untuk setiap sumber yang tersambung dalam menu Sumber. Menyesuaikan penyempurnaan warna (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Warna > Pe nyempurnaan warna. Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum untuk mengatur tingkat intensitas warna dan detail dalam warna-warna terang. 48

49 Memilih suhu warna preset Mode RGB Saja (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Warna > Suhu warna. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Warna > Mo de RGB Saja. Pilih Normal, Hangat, atau Dingin untuk mengatur suhu warna berdasarkan preferensi Anda. Pilih Merah, Hijau, atau Biru untuk mengubah gambar menjadi warna saja, atau pilih Tidak aktif untuk menonaktifkan mode RGB. Menyesuaikan suhu warna (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Warna > Suhu warna kustom. Pengaturan Kontras Lanjutan Mode Kontras Pilih Kustom di menu Suhu warna untuk menyesuaikan suhu warna sendiri. Tekan panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai. WP adalah titik putih dan BL adalah tingkat hitam. Anda juga dapat memilih salah satu preset di menu ini. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Kontras > M ode Kontras. Pilih Normal, Dioptimalkan untuk gambar, atau Dioptimalkan untuk menghemat daya untuk mengatur agar TV otomatis menurunkan kontras, demi konsumsi daya terbaik atau pengalaman gambar terbaik, atau pilih Tidak aktif untuk menonaktifkan penyetelan. Pengaturan Warna ISF Tentang ISF Maksimalkan tampilan TV Anda dengan Kalibrasi ISF. Mintalah ahli kalibrasi ISF untuk datang ke rumah dan mengatur TV ke pengaturan gambar paling optimal. Minta dealer Anda untuk melakukan Kalibrasi ISF. Pengaturan HDR Jika sedang menyaksikan program HDR - program yang direkam dalam HDR - Anda tidak perlu lagi meningkatkan ke HDR dan pengaturan HDR tidak tersedia. TV dapat memutar program HDR dari koneksi HDMI, dari sumber Internet, atau dari perangkat USB yang terhubung. Manfaat kalibrasi adalah gambar yang lebih jernih dan tajam detail yang lebih baik di bagian terang dan gelap hitam yang lebih dalam dan lebih pekat kemurnian dan kualitas warna lebih baik mengoptimalkan efek tampilan gambar di menu awal Anda untuk kondisi siang dan malam hari Jika Anda menonton program HDR (High-Dynamic Range) - program yang direkam di HDR - TV akan secara otomatis diubah ke mode HDR dengan indikasi. Ahli Kalibrasi ISF menyimpan dan mengunci pengaturan ISF sebagai dua gaya gambar. Ketika Kalibrasi ISF selesai, tekan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Gaya Gambar > Siang atau Malam. Pilih Siang untuk menonton TV selama kondisi cahaya terang atau pilih Malam saat gelap. Kontrol Peningkatan HDR tidak tersedia. TV dapat memutar program HDR dari koneksi HDMI 1 atau HDMI 2, siaran, dari sumber Internet, atau dari perangkat memori USB yang tersambung. Hanya HDR10 dan Hybrid Log Gamma HDR yang didukung Kontrol Warna (Rona, Saturasi, dan Intensitas) Peningkatan HDR, Kecerahan Tinggi, dan Konversi (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Warna > Kontrol warna. HDR (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Kontras > P eningkatan HDR / Kecerahan Tinggi / Konversi HDR. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai Rona, Saturasi, dan Intensitas, atau pilih Atur ulang semua untuk mengatur ulang semua nilai ke default. Pilih Aktif untuk meningkatkan kecerahan dan 49

50 kontras gambar. Gambar jadi lebih cerah dan memiliki tingkat kontras lebih tinggi antara bagian yang lebih terang dan lebih gelap. Peningkatan HDR menjaga warna tetap kaya dan tersaturasi. Atur tingkat Konversi HDR atau lihat demo di video live. Sensor Cahaya (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Kontras > S ensor cahaya. Catatan: Pilih Aktif untuk menyesuaikan pengaturan gambar secara otomatis sesuai kondisi pencahayaan ruangan. Tersedia ketika sinyal SDR (Standard Dynamic Range) terdeteksi. Tidak tersedia ketika konten video didukung HDR. Pengaturan Ketajaman Lanjutan Resolusi Ultra HDR Sempurna (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Ketajaman > Resolusi Ultra. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Kontras > H DR Sempurna. Pilih Aktif untuk mendapatkan ketajaman superior dalam tepi garis dan detail. Pilih HDR Sempurna untuk efek kontras dan kecerahan yang superior. Catatan: Tersedia ketika sinyal HDR (High Dynamic Range) terdeteksi. Pembersihan Gambar Reduksi noise Kontras Sempurna (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Pembersihan gambar > Reduksi noise. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Kontras > K ontras sempurna. Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum untuk mengatur tingkatan penghapusan noise dalam konten video. Noise biasanya terlihat sebagai titik-titik kecil yang bergerak dalam gambar di layar. Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum untuk mengatur tingkat penyempurnaan detail TV secara otomatis di area gelap, sedang, dan terang pada gambar. Pengurang Artefak MPEG Kontras Video, Gamma (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Pembersihan gambar > Pengurang Artefak MPEG. Kontras video (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Kontras > K ontras video. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau mengatur tingkat kontras video. Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum untuk mendapatkan tingkat penghalusan artefak yang berbeda dalam konten video digital. Artefak MPEG biasanya terlihat sebagai balok kecil atau tepi bergerigi pada gambar di layar. (turun) untuk Gamma Pengaturan Gambar (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Kontras > G amma. Gambar Alami Gambar Alami Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk melakukan pengaturan non-linier bagi luminansi dan kontras gambar. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Gambar > N 50

51 atural Motion. Format Gambar Natural Motion membuat gerakan menjadi mulus dan lancar. Jika gambar tidak ditampilkan penuh pada layar, jika ada bilah hitam di atas atau bawah atau di kedua sisi, Anda dapat menyesuaikan gambar untuk ditampilkan penuh pada layar. Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum untuk mendapatkan tingkat pengurangan getaran gambar, yang terlihat dalam film di TV. Pilih Minimum atau Tidak aktif ketika noise tampak saat memutar gambar bergerak di layar. Untuk memilih salah satu pengaturan dasar untuk mengisi layar Catatan: Hanya tersedia ketika Gaya gambar diatur ke Pribadi. 1 - Saat menonton saluran TV, tekan. 2 - Pilih Format Gambar > Isi Layar, Disesuaikan Dengan Layar, Layar Lebar dan Asli, dan 3 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Isi Layar secara otomatis memperbesar gambar untuk mengisi layar. Distorsi gambar minimal, terjemahan tetap terlihat. Tidak sesuai untuk input PC. Beberapa format gambar ekstrem dapat tetap menampilkan bilah hitam. Disesuaikan dengan Layar secara otomatis memperbesar gambar untuk mengisi layar tanpa distorsi. Bilah hitam mungkin terlihat. Tidak sesuai untuk input PC. Layar Lebar secara otomatis memperbesar layar ke layar lebar. Asli secara otomatis memperbesar layar ke layar lebar. Perfect Clear Motion (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Gambar > P erfect Clear Motion. Perfect Clear Motion membuat gerakan menjadi halus dan lancar. Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum untuk mendapatkan tingkat pengurangan getaran gambar, yang terlihat dalam film di TV. Pilih Minimum atau Tidak aktif ketika noise tampak saat memutar gambar bergerak di layar. Catatan: Hanya tersedia ketika Gaya gambar diatur ke Pribadi. Untuk memformat gambar secara manual 1 - Saat menonton saluran TV, tekan. 2 - Pilih Lanjutan dan 3 - Gunakan Geser, Zoom atau Regangkan untuk menyesuaikan gambar. 4 - Atau pilih Urungkan untuk kembali ke pengaturan untuk gambar saat Anda membuka Format Gambar. Geser Klik tanda panah untuk menggeser gambar. Anda hanya dapat menggeser gambar saat sedang diperbesar. Zoom Klik tanda panah untuk memperbesar. Regangkan Klik tanda panah untuk meregangkan gambar secara vertikal atau horizontal. Urungkan Klik untuk kembali ke format gambar sebelumnya. Menghapus Gambar Residu Menampilkan gambar diam dalam waktu lama dapat menyebabkan gambar menempel. Fenomena ini normal untuk panel OLED. Hindari menampilkan gambar diam pada layar TV untuk jangka waktu yang lama. Atau Anda dapat menghapus retensi gambar pada layar tersebut dengan mengaktifkan fungsi ini. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Gambar dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Lanjutan > Hapus Gambar Residu. 4 - Pilih Konfirmasikan. TV akan dimatikan sampai proses ini selesai. Jika Anda sedang merekam sesuatu, proses akan dihentikan lalu dimulai lagi setelah perekaman selesai. Proses bisa memakan waktu lebih dari 1 jam. Jika Anda menghidupkan TV selama proses berlangsung, proses akan dihentikan dan akan dimulai secara otomatis ketika TV beralih ke siaga. Selama proses, garis putih dapat terlihat di layar. Ini normal ketika menghapus retensi gambar pada layar. Pengaturan Gambar Cepat Saat penginstalan pertama, Anda melakukan beberapa pengaturan gambar dalam beberapa langkah mudah. Anda dapat mengulangi langkahlangkah ini dengan Pengaturan Gambar Cepat. Untuk melakukan langkah ini, pastikan TV dapat menyetel saluran TV atau menampilkan program dari perangkat yang tersambung. Untuk menetapkan gambar dalam beberapa langkah mudah 51

52 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Gambar dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Pengaturan Gambar Cepat lalu 4 - Gunakan tombol navigasi untuk memilih pilihan Anda. 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Pengaturan Mode mahir > Ekualiser TV. Suara Pilih Di dudukan TV atau Di Dinding untuk mendapatkan reproduksi suara terbaik sesuai pengaturan. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau menyesuaikan tingkat Ekualiser. Penempatan TV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Penempatan Gaya Suara Memilih gaya (Menu TV) > suara. (turun) untuk Pengaturan Suara Lanjutan Pengaturan > Suara > Gaya Kontrol Volume Untuk memudahkan penyesuaian suara, Anda dapat memilih pengaturan preset dengan gaya suara. Volume otomatis (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Volume otomatis. Asli - Pengaturan suara paling netral Film - Ideal untuk menonton film Musik - Ideal untuk mendengarkan musik Permainan - Ideal untuk permainan Berita - Ideal untuk percakapan Mode mahir - Mengakses pengaturan suara lebih mendalam. Pilih DTS TruVolume untuk menghadirkan output yang mantap dan konsisten. Pilih Mode Malam untuk pengalaman mendengarkan yang lebih tenang dan nyaman. Mengembalikan Gaya 1 - Pilih gaya suara yang ingin Anda kembalikan. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Kmblkn gaya, dan Gaya dikembalikan. Volume delta Pengaturan Mode mahir (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Volume delta. DTS TruSurround Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai delta untuk volume speaker TV. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Pengaturan mode mahir > DTS TruSurround. Pengaturan Audio Out Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan tingkat DTS TruSurround. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Audio out. Atur TV untuk memutar suara di TV atau di sistem audio yang tersambung. DTS TruDialog (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Pengaturan mode mahir > DTS TruDialog > Aktif. Anda dapat memilih di mana Anda ingin mendengarkan suara TV dan bagaimana Anda ingin mengontrolnya. Jika memilih Speaker TV Nonaktif, Anda menonaktifkan speaker TV secara permanen. Jika Anda memilih Speaker TV, speaker TV selalu aktif. Jika Anda memilih Headphone, suara akan diputar melalui headphone. Pilih Aktif untuk mendapatkan peningkatan kualitas suara untuk program percakapan. Ekualiser (Menu 52

53 Dengan perangkat audio yang tersambung ke HDMI CEC, pilih Sistem suara HDMI. TV akan menonaktifkan speaker TV ketika perangkat memutar suara. perlu menyesuaikan penundaan sinkronisasi audio untuk menyinkronkan audio ke video. Pilih Tidak aktif jika penundaan suara diatur pada Suara. Offset output digital (Hanya tersedia ketika Penundaan output digital diatur ke Aktif) (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Offset output digital. Pengaturan Output Digital Pengaturan output digital tersedia untuk sinyal suara HDMI ARC dan optik. Jika Anda tidak dapat mengatur penundaan pada Sistem Home Theatre, Anda dapat mengatur TV untuk menyinkronkan suara. Anda dapat mengatur offset yang mengompensasi waktu yang diperlukan Sistem Home Theatre untuk memproses suara gambar TV. Anda dapat mengatur nilai dalam kelipatan 5 mdtk. Pengaturan maksimumnya adalah 60 mdtk. Format output digital (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Format output digital. Atur sinyal audio out TV agar sesuai dengan kemampuan suara dari Sistem Home Theatre yang tersambung. Stereo: Jika perangkat pemutaran audio tidak memiliki pemrosesan suara multisaluran, pilih hanya output konten stereo ke perangkat pemutaran audio Anda. Multisaluran: Pilih hanya output konten audio 5.1 (sinyal suara multisaluran terkompresi) ke perangkat pemutaran audio Anda. Multisaluran (bypass): Pilih untuk output konten Dolby Digital Plus atau DTS ke perangkat pemutaran audio Anda atau sistem Home theatre Pengaturan Ambilight Aktifkan atau Nonaktifkan Ambilight Menonaktifkan Ambilight Tekan AMBILIGHT dan pilih Tidak aktif, atau Anda dapat menonaktifkan dengan menekan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Gaya Ambilight > Tidak aktif. - Pastikan perangkat pemutaran audio Anda mendukung fitur Dolby Atmos. - Output SPDIF (DIGITAL AUDIO OUT) akan dinonaktifkan saat streaming konten Dolby Digital Plus. Gaya Ambilight Anda dapat memilih bagaimana Ambilight mengikutinya. Pelevelan output digital (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Pelevelan output digital. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Gaya Ambilight. Sesuaikan tingkat kekencangan suara dari perangkat yang tersambung ke output audio digital (SPDIF) atau HDMI. Ikuti video (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Gaya Ambilight > Ikuti video. Pilih Tambah untuk membesarkan volume. Pilih Kurang untuk mengecilkan suara. Pilih salah satu gaya yang mengikuti dinamika gambar di layar TV. Penundaan output digital Standar - Ideal untuk menonton TV sehari-hari Alami - Mengikuti gambar atau suara senyata mungkin Sepak bola - Ideal untuk pertandingan sepak bola Tajam - Ideal untuk kondisi siang hari Permainan - Ideal untuk permainan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Penundaan output digital. Untuk beberapa Sistem Home Theatre, Anda mungkin 53

54 Nyaman - Ideal untuk malam hari yang sunyi Santai - Ideal untuk nuansa ruang santai mengatur tingkat saturasi Ambilight. Ambilight + Hue Ikuti audio (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Gaya Ambilight > Ikuti audio. Mengonfigurasi (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Konfigurasi. Pilih salah satu gaya yang mengikuti dinamika suara. Lumina - Mencampur dinamika audio dengan warna video Warna-warni - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Retro - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Spektrum - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Pemindai - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Irama - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Party - Campuran semua gaya Ikuti Audio, satu per satu Konfigurasikan bola lampu Rona Philips Anda untuk mengikuti warna Ambilight. Mematikan Menonaktifkan Ambilight+hue (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Nonaktifkan. Ikuti warna (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Gaya Ambilight > Ikuti warna. Imersif (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Imersif. Pilih salah satu gaya warna preset. Lahar panas - Variasi warna merah Kedalaman air - Variasi warna biru Alam segar - Variasi warna hijau Putih hangat - Warna statis Putih dingin - Warna statis Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan seberapa akurat bola lampu Rona mengikuti warna Ambilight. Ikuti aplikasi Light+hue Ruang Santai (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Gaya Ambilight > Ikuti aplikasi. Jika Anda memasang Ambilight+hue, Anda dapat membuat bola lampu rona mengikuti Cahaya Lounge dari Ambilight. Lampu rona Philips akan memperluas efek Cahaya Lounge di seluruh ruangan. Fungsi ini tersedia bila Anda mengontrol Ambilight menggunakan aplikasi. Menyalakan/mematikan bola lampu hue (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Light+hue ruang santai. Kecerahan Ambilight, Saturasi Kecerahan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Kecerahan. Lihat Konfigurasi atau Atur Ulang Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk mengatur tingkat kecerahan Ambilight. Melihat pengaturan saat ini dari Ambilight+hue, Saturasi (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Lihat konfigurasi. jaringan, Bridge, dan bola lampu (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Saturasi. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk Mengatur ulang pengaturan Ambilight+hue saat ini 54

55 Mengaktifkan sensor cahaya sekitar bawaan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Atur ulang konfigurasi. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan ekonomis > Sensor cahaya. Pilih Sensor cahaya, sensor bawaan untuk cahaya sekitar akan menurunkan kecerahan layar TV ketika cahaya sekitar menjadi gelap. Sensor cahaya bawaan secara otomatis menyesuaikan gambar sesuai dengan kondisi pencahayaan ruangan. Pengaturan Ambilight Lanjutan Menetralkan pengaruh warna pada warna Mengatur pengatur waktu mati TV Ambilight (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan ekonomis > Pengatur waktu mati. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Lanjutan > Warna dinding. Tekan panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai. Nilai 0 (Tidak aktif) menonaktifkan fitur mati otomatis. Pilih warna dinding di belakang TV dan TV akan mengubah warna Ambilight agar tampak seperti yang diinginkan. Pilih Pengatur waktu mati, TV akan mati secara otomatis untuk menghemat daya. TV akan mati jika menerima sinyal TV tapi Anda tidak menekan tombol remote control selama 4 jam. Penyetelan ISF (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Lanjutan > TV akan mati jika tidak menerima sinyal TV atau tidak ada perintah dari remote control selama 10 menit. Jika Anda menggunakan TV sebagai monitor atau menggunakan penerima digital untuk menonton TV (Set-Top Box - STB) dan Anda tidak menggunakan remote control TV, sebaiknya nonaktifkan fitur mati otomatis ini, dengan mengatur nilainya ke 0. Penyetelan ISF. Mengatur Ambilight agar langsung mati atau perlahan mati saat Anda mematikan TV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Lanjutan > TV mati Pengaturan Umum Hard Drive USB 13.4 Pengaturan Ekonomis Anda perlu mengatur dan memformat Hard Drive USB sebelum merekam saluran. Mengatur tingkat hemat daya (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Hard Drive USB. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan ekonomis > Hemat daya. Sebelum Anda dapat menjeda atau merekam siaran, Anda harus menyambungkan dan memformat Hard Drive USB. Memformat akan menghapus semua file dari Hard Drive USB. Jika Anda ingin merekam siaran dengan data Panduan TV dari Internet, Anda harus mengonfigurasi sambungan Internet terlebih dahulu sebelum memasang Hard Drive USB. Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum agar mendapatkan tingkat hemat daya berbeda, atau pilih Tidak aktif untuk menonaktifkan mode hemat daya. Mengatur layar tidak aktif agar hemat daya Peringatan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan ekonomis > Layar tidak aktif. Hard Drive USB diformat secara eksklusif untuk TV ini, sehingga Anda tidak dapat menggunakan rekaman yang disimpan pada TV atau PC lainnya. Jangan menyalin atau mengubah file di Hard Drive USB dengan aplikasi PC apa pun. Hal ini akan merusak rekaman Anda. Jika Anda memformat Hard Drive USB Pilih Layar tidak aktif, layar TV dinonaktifkan, untuk mengaktifkan kembali layar TV, tekan tombol apa pun pada remote control. 55

56 lainnya, konten pada Hard Drive USB sebelumnya akan hilang. Hard Drive USB yang terpasang di TV Anda akan perlu diformat ulang untuk digunakan dengan komputer. Menyesuaikan Gambar dan audio Untuk memformat Hard Drive USB Pilih Dioptimalkan untuk toko atau Kustom untuk pengaturan gambar dan audio. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Konfigurasi toko > Gambar dan audio. 1 - Sambungkan Hard Drive USB ke salah satu sambungan USB pada TV. Jangan menyambungkan perangkat USB lainnya ke port USB lain saat memformat. 2 - Hidupkan Hard Drive USB dan TV. 3 - Pilih Rekaman jika Anda ingin melakukan Jeda TV dan Rekaman, jika tidak, pilih Aplikasi untuk menyimpan aplikasi. Ikuti petunjuk pada layar. 4 - Semua file dan data akan dihapus setelah memformat. 5 - Saat Hard Drive USB diformat, biarkan Hard Drive USB tersambung secara permanen. Mengatur Logo dan banner (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Konfigurasi toko > Logo dan banner. Atur untuk menampilkan Logo Fitur dan Banner Promosi. Otomatis Mulai Demo Me dan Otomatis Mulai Demo Ambilight (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Konfigurasi Toko > Otomatis Mulai Demo Me / Otomatis Mulai Demo Ambilight. Pengaturan Keyboard USB yang dipasang Aktifkan/Nonaktifkan Otomatis Mulai Demo Me atau Demo Ambilight. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Pengaturan keyb. USB. Otomatis Mulai Demo Me atau Otomatis Mulai Demo Ambilight Mengatur tata letak keyboard untuk keyboard USB Sambungkan keyboard USB ke salah satu sambungan USB pada TV ini. Jika TV mendeteksi keyboard untuk pertama kali, Anda dapat memilih tata letak keyboard Anda dan menguji pemilihan Anda. EasyLink - HDMI CEC Sambungkan perangkat yang kompatibel dengan HDMI CEC ke TV, Anda dapat mengoperasikannya dengan remote control TV. Rumah atau Toko EasyLink HDMI CEC harus diaktifkan pada TV dan perangkat yang tersambung. Memilih lokasi TV Anda (Menu TV) > umum > Lokasi. Mengaktifkan EasyLink Pengaturan > Pengaturan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > EasyLink > EasyLink > Aktif. Pilih Toko, gaya gambar dikembalikan ke Tajam, dan dapat menyetel pengaturan toko. Mode toko adalah untuk promosi di toko. Mengoperasikan perangkat yang kompatibel HDMI CEC dengan remote control TV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > EasyLink > Remote control EasyLink > Aktif. Konfigurasi Toko Catatan: Menyesuaikan pengaturan toko EasyLink mungkin tidak berfungsi pada perangkat dari merek lain. Fungsionalitas HDMI CEC memiliki nama yang berbeda pada merek yang berbeda. Beberapa contohnya adalah: Anynet, Aquos Link, Bravia Theatre Sync, Kuro Link, Simplink dan Viera Link. Tidak semua merek sepenuhnya kompatibel dengan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Pengaturan toko. Jika TV ditetapkan ke Toko, Anda dapat menetapkan ketersediaan demo tertentu untuk penggunaan di toko. 56

57 EasyLink. Contoh nama merek HDMI CEC adalah properti masing-masing pemiliknya. Catatan: Di beberapa wilayah dan untuk beberapa saluran, informasi panduan TV mungkin tidak tersedia. TV tidak bisa mengumpulkan informasi panduan TV dari saluran yang dilihat dari penerima atau dekoder digital. Mode game otomatis HDMI Mengatur Mode game otomatis HDMI (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Mode game otomatis HDMI. Logo Saluran Atur Mode game otomatis HDMI ke Aktif, jika Anda ingin TV otomatis mengatur Gaya gambar ke Permainan ketika perangkat HDMI tersambung ke TV. Menonaktifkan logo saluran (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan Umum > Lanjutan > Logo saluran. HDMI Ultra HD Pengaturan HbbTV - Hybrid Broadcast Broadband TV Sambungkan perangkat HDMI dan jalankan sinyal Ultra HD di TV Anda, mungkin tidak bekerja dengan baik atau menampilkan gambar atau suara yang terdistorsi. Untuk menghindari kerusakan perangkat semacam ini, Anda dapat menetapkan sinyal ke level yang dapat ditangani oleh perangkat. Mengaktifkan HbbTV Mengatur kualitas sinyal untuk setiap konektor (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Lanjutan > Pengaturan HbbTV > HbbTV > Aktif. HDMI Menonaktifkan Pelacakan Riwayat HbbTV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan Umum > HDMI Ultra HD > HDMI 1&2 > UHD 4:2:0, UHD 4:4:4/4:2:2. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Lanjutan > Pengaturan HbbTV > Pelacakan HbbTV > Tidak aktif. Pengaturan UHD 4:4:4/4:2:2 memungkinkan sinyal UHD YCbCr 4:4:4 / 4:2:2. Pengaturan UHD 4:2:0 memungkinkan sinyal UHD YCbCr 4:2:0. Menghapus Cookie HbbTV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Lanjutan > Pengaturan HbbTV > Cookie HbbTV > Aktif. Jika perangkat tidak menggunakan sinyal Ultra HD, Anda dapat mematikan Ultra HD untuk sambungan HDMI ini. Data menonton Mengatur kualitas sinyal untuk setiap konektor Ini membawa Anda ke pengaturan Data Menonton, tempat Anda dapat mengaktifkan atau menonaktifkan pengumpulan data menonton oleh Inscape Data, Inc. (Inscape) dan menyediakan akses ke Kebijakan Privasi Inscape yang menjelaskan bagaimana Data Menonton dikumpulkan (jika Anda mengaktifkan pengumpulan) dan digunakan. HDMI (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan Umum > HDMI Ultra HD > HDMI 1&2 > UHD Tidak Aktif. Mengaktifkan atau menonaktifkan Data menonton Lanjutan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Data menonton > Pengaturan data menonton. Panduan TV Panduan TV menerima informasi (data) dari stasiun penyiaran atau dari Internet. TV bisa mengumpulkan informasi Panduan TV untuk saluran yang diinstal di TV. Di sinilah Anda dapat mengaktifkan atau menonaktifkan penumpulan data menonton oleh Inscape Data, Inc. Memilih asal penerimaan sumber data panduan TV Catatan: (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Lanjutan > Panduan TV. Di beberapa wilayah dan untuk beberapa TV, data menonton belum tentu tersedia. 57

58 Data menonton menggunakan teknologi Automated Content Recognition (ACR) dari Inscape. Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang Fitur ACR dan data yang dikumpulkan, lihat Kebijakan Privasi Inscape. bahasa > Bahasa > Audio primer, Audio sekunder. Saluran TV Digital dapat menyiarkan audio dengan beberapa bahasa yang diucapkan untuk program. Anda dapat menetapkan bahasa audio primer dan sekunder yang Anda pilih. Jika audio pada salah satu bahasa ini tersedia, TV akan beralih ke audio ini. Nama Profil CAM Mengatur nama profil untuk CI+/CAM yang Mengatur bahasa preferensi terjemahan terpasang (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Bahasa > Terjemahan primer, Terjemahan sekunder. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Nama profil CAM. Saluran digital dapat menawarkan beberapa bahasa terjemahan untuk sebuah program. Anda dapat menetapkan bahasa terjemahan primer dan sekunder pilihan Anda. Jika terjemahan di salah satu bahasa ini tersedia, TV akan menampilkan terjemahan yang Anda pilih. Atur ulang Pengaturan TV dan Pasang ulang TV Mengatur ulang semua nilai pengaturan ke pengaturan TV asli (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Pengaturan pabrik. Mengatur bahasa preferensi teleteks Mengulang penginstalan TV lengkap, dan mengatur kembali status TV ke saat pertama kali Anda Beberapa stasiun penyiaran TV digital menyediakan beberapa bahasa Teks. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Bahasa > Teks primer, Teks sekunder. menghidupkannya (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Instal ulang TV. Jam Masukkan kode PIN dan pilih Ya, TV akan diinstal ulang sepenuhnya. (Menu TV) > bahasa > Jam. Pengaturan > Wilayah dan Semua pengaturan akan direset dan saluran yang diinstal akan diganti. Mengoreksi jam secara otomatis Penginstalan ini akan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Jam > Mode jam otomatis. Pengaturan standar untuk jam TV adalah Otomatis. Informasi waktu berasal dari informasi UTC - Waktu Universal Terkoordinasi yang disiarkan. Jika jamnya tidak tepat, Anda dapat mengatur jam TV ke Tergantung negara Pengaturan Jam, Wilayah, dan Bahasa Bahasa Mengoreksi jam secara manual (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Bahasa. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Jam > Mode jam otomatis > Manual. Mengubah bahasa menu TV dan pesan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Jam > Tanggal, Waktu. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Bahasa > Bahasa menu. Kunjungi menu sebelumnya, dan pilih Tanggal dan Waktu untuk menyesuaikan nilainya. Catatan: Jika tidak ada pengaturan otomatis yang menampilkan waktu secara tepat, Anda dapat mengatur waktu secara manual. Mengatur bahasa preferensi audio (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan 58

59 Jika Anda menjadwalkan rekaman dari Panduan TV, sebaiknya Anda tidak mengubah waktu dan tanggal secara manual. terjemahan khusus yang disesuaikan untuk orang yang sulit mendengar atau tuna rungu. Setelah diaktifkan, TV secara otomatis beralih ke audio dan terjemahan yang disesuaikan, jika tersedia. Mengatur zona waktu atau mengatur offset waktu untuk wilayah Anda Akses universal bagi tuna netra atau tuna netra (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Jam > Zona waktu. parsial (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Akses universal > Deskripsi audio > Deskripsi audio > Aktif. Mengatur TV untuk beralih ke siaga secara otomatis Saluran TV digital dapat menyiarkan komentar audio khusus yang menjelaskan apa yang sedang terjadi di layar. setelah waktu preset (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Jam > Timer Tidur. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Akses universal > Deskripsi audio > Deskripsi audio > Volume campuran, Efek audio, Ucapan. Keyboard Remote Control Pilih Volume campuran, Anda dapat mencampur volume audio normal dengan komentar audio. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai. Atur Efek audio ke Aktif untuk efek audio ekstra dalam audio komentar, seperti suara stereo atau memudar. Pilih Ucapan untuk mengatur preferensi ucapan, Keterangan, atau Terjemahan. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Keyboard remote control Untuk mengatur tata letak keyboard ke Qwerty atau Azerty Pengaturan Android (Menu TV) > Android Pengaturan Kunci Pengaturan > Pengaturan Tetapkan Kode dan Ubah Kode Melihat daftar Aplikasi yang terinstal, periksa ruang kosong untuk mengunduh aplikasi lainnya atau hapus instalasi Aplikasi. Mengatur kode baru atau mengatur ulang ubah kode (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Penguncian anak > Tetapkan kode, Ubah kode Pengaturan Akses Universal (Menu TV) > Kode penguncian anak digunakan untuk mengunci atau membuka kunci saluran atau program. Pengaturan > Akses universal. Catatan: Saat Akses Universal diaktifkan, TV akan disiapkan untuk penonton tunarungu, sulit mendengar, tuna netra atau tuna netra parsial. Jika Anda lupa kode PIN, Anda dapat menimpa kode saat ini menggunakan 8888 dan memasukkan kode baru. Mengaktifkan pengaturan akses universal Penguncian Program (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Akses universal > Akses universal > Aktif. Mengatur usia minimal untuk menonton program berperingkat (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Penguncian anak > Peringkat org tua. Akses universal bagi orang yang sulit mendengar (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Akses universal > Sulit mendengar > Aktif. Beberapa saluran TV digital menyiarkan audio dan 59

60 Penguncian Aplikasi Mengatur penguncian aplikasi Galeri Aplikasi (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Penguncian anak > Kunci Aplikasi. Anda dapat mengunci aplikasi yang tidak cocok untuk anak-anak. Anda dapat mengunci aplikasi dengan rating 18+ dari Galeri Aplikasi atau menyiapkan profil terbatas di menu Awal. 18+ Kunci aplikasi 18+ akan meminta kode PIN saat Anda mencoba memulai aplikasi dengan rating 18+. Kunci ini hanya berlaku untuk aplikasi dengan rating 18+ dari Galeri Aplikasi Philips. Profil terbatas Anda dapat menyiapkan profil terbatas untuk menu Awal di mana yang tersedia hanyalah aplikasi yang Anda izinkan. Anda perlu memasukan kode PIN untuk menyiapkan dan mengaktifkan profil terbatas. Google Play Store - Kedewasaan Di Google Play Store, Anda dapat menyembunyikan aplikasi sesuai dengan kedewasaan pengguna/pembeli. Anda perlu memasukkan kode PIN untuk memilih atau mengubah tingkat kedewasaan. Tingkat kedewasaan akan menentukan aplikasi mana yang tersedia untuk diinstal. Penguncian CAM Mengatur PIN CAM untuk merekam (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Penguncian anak > PIN CAM. 60

61 Video, Foto dan Musik Menu Paling Populer dan Menu Terakhir Diputar Anda dapat melihat foto Anda atau memutar musik dan video dari komputer atau NAS (Network Attached Storage) di jaringan rumah Anda. Melihat file paling populer atau menghapus daftar 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan pilih Paling populer. 3 - Pilih salah satu file dan tekan OK untuk melihat file atau tekan Hapus semua untuk menghapus daftar. TV dan komputer atau NAS harus berada di jaringan rumah yang sama. Di komputer atau NAS Anda, Anda perlu menginstal Perangkat Lunak Server Media. Server Media Anda harus diatur untuk berbagi file dengan TV. TV menampilkan file dan folder Anda sebagaimana file dan folder tersebut diorganisir oleh Server Media atau sebagaimana file dan folder tersebut disusun di komputer atau NAS. Melihat file yang terakhir diputar 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan pilih Terakhir diputar. 3 - Pilih salah satu file dan tekan OK untuk melihat file atau tekan Hapus semua untuk menghapus daftar. TV ini tidak mendukung terjemahan pada streaming video dari komputer atau NAS Jika Server Media mendukung pencarian file, bidang pencarian akan tersedia. Dari Sambungan USB Untuk menelusuri dan memutar file di komputer Anda dapat melihat foto atau memutar musik dan video dari flash drive USB atau Hard Drive USB yang tersambung Dari Komputer atau NAS 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih Jaringan dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat SimplyShare dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Anda bisa menelusuri dan memutar file. 4 - Untuk berhenti memutar video, foto dan musik, tekan EXIT. Dengan TV yang dinyalakan, colokkan flash drive USB atau Hard Drive USB ke salah satu sambungan USB. TV mendeteksi perangkat dan akan mencantumkan file media Anda. Jika daftar file tidak muncul otomatis 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Anda bisa menelusuri file di struktur folder yang sudah Anda tata di drive. 4 - Tekan Putar semua untuk memutar semua file di folder USB atau tekan Tandai favorit untuk menambahkan folder yang dipilih ke menu favorit- Favorit. 5 - Untuk berhenti memutar video, foto dan musik, tekan EXIT Menu Favorit Menambahkan folder atau file ke menu favorit 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan pilih folder atau file. 3 - Tekan Tandai favorit (hijau) untuk menambahkan folder atau file yang dipilih ke menu favorit. Peringatan Jika Anda mencoba menjeda atau merekam dengan Hard Drive USB yang tersambung, TV akan meminta Anda untuk memformat Hard Drive USB. Pemformatan ini akan menghapus semua file saat ini di Hard Drive USB. Melihat file favorit 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan pilih Favorit. 3 - Anda dapat melihat semua file favorit di daftar. 61

62 7 - Bahasa audio: pilih bahasa audio 8 - Acak: memutar file Anda secara acak 9 - Ulangi: memutar semua video di folder ini satu kali atau terus-menerus 14.5 Memutar Video Anda Memutar Video Jika tombol INFO tersedia di remote control Anda Membuka folder video 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Pilih Video, Anda dapat menekan Tandai favorit untuk menambahkan folder video ke menu favorit - Favorit. Opsi Video Telusuri file video... Daftar/Gambar mini Tayangan daftar atau gambar mini Acak Memutar file Anda secara acak Ulangi Memutar semua video di folder ini satu kali atau terus-menerus Info Menampilkan informasi video Memutar video 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Pilih Video dan pilih salah satu video, Anda dapat menekan Putar semua untuk memutar semua file di folder atau tekan Tandai sebagai favorit untuk menambahkan video yang dipilih ke menu favorit - Favorit. Memutar file video... Tandai sebagai favorit Menandai video sebagai favorit Pengaturan terjemahan Mengatur warna, posisi, dan ukuran font terjemahan...dll Info Menampilkan informasi video Bilah kontrol Untuk menampilkan atau menyembunyikan bilah kontrol saat video diputar, tekan INFO Melihat Foto Anda Tentang Menu Foto Anda dapat menemukan foto dengan cepat menggunakan pengurutan: 1 - Tekan Urutkan (kuning). 2 - Pilih Terbaru Terlebih Dahulu, Terlama Terlebih Dahulu, A > Z, Z > A. Melihat Foto 1 - Panel kemajuan 2 - Bilah kontrol pemutaran - : Lompat ke video sebelumnya di folder - : Lompat ke video berikutnya di folder - : Putar mundur - : Maju cepat - : Jeda pemutaran Membuka folder foto 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Pilih Foto, Anda dapat menekan Tandai favorit untuk menambahkan folder foto ke menu favorit - Favorit atau tekan Urutkan untuk menemukan foto dengan cepat. 3 - Tandai sebagai favorit 4 - Putar semua video 5 - Terjemahan: beralih ke Terjemahan aktif, Tidak aktif, atau Aktif Saat Diam. 6 - Bahasa terjemahan: pilih Bahasa Terjemahan Melihat foto 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 62

63 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Pilih Foto dan pilih salah satu foto, Anda dapat menekan Tayangan slide untuk memutar semua file di folder atau tekan Tandai favorit untuk menambahkan foto yang dipilih ke menu favorit - Favorit. Info Menampilkan informasi video 14.7 Memutar Musik Anda Tentang Menu Musik Anda dapat menemukan musik dengan cepat menggunakan klasifikasi: Genre, Artis, Album, Trek. Bilah kontrol Memutar Musik Membuka folder foto 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Pilih Musik, Anda dapat menekan Tandai favorit untuk menambahkan folder musik ke menu favorit - Favorit. 4 - Anda dapat menemukan musik dengan cepat menggunakan klasifikasi - Genre, Artis, Album, Trek. 1 - Bilah kontrol pemutaran - : Lompat ke foto sebelumnya di folder - : Lompat ke foto berikutnya di folder - : Jeda pemutaran tayangan slide Memutar musik 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Pilih Musik dan pilih salah satu klasifikasi untuk melihat file musik. 4 - Pilih musik dan Anda dapat menekan Putar semua untuk memutar semua file di folder atau tekan Tandai favorit untuk menambahkan musik yang dipilih ke menu favorit - Favorit. 2 - Tandai sebagai favorit 3 - Mulai tayangan slide 4 - Putar foto 5 - Acak: memutar file Anda secara acak 6 - Ulangi: memutar semua foto di folder ini satu kali atau terus-menerus 7 - Menghentikan pemutaran musik di latar belakang 8 - Mengatur kecepatan tayangan slide Bilah kontrol Opsi Foto Telusuri file foto... Daftar/Gambar mini Tayangan daftar atau gambar mini Acak Memutar file Anda secara acak Ulangi Memutar tayangan slide sekali atau terusmenerus Kecepatan Tayangan Slide Mengatur kecepatan tayangan slide 1 - Panel kemajuan 2 - Bilah kontrol pemutaran - : Lompat ke musik sebelumnya di folder - : Lompat ke musik berikutnya di folder - : Putar mundur - : Maju cepat Memutar file foto... Tandai sebagai favorit Menandai foto sebagai favorit 63

64 - : Jeda pemutaran 3 - Tandai sebagai favorit 4 - Putar semua musik 5 - Acak: memutar file Anda secara acak 6 - Ulangi: memutar semua musik di folder ini satu kali atau terus-menerus Opsi Musik Telusuri file musik... Acak Memutar file Anda secara acak. Ulangi Memutar semua lagu di folder ini satu kali atau terus-menerus. Memutar file musik... Tandai sebagai favorit Menandai musik sebagai favorit Info Menampilkan informasi musik 64

65 mengubah pengaturan ke Dari Internet atau sebaliknya. TV mungkin sudah otomatis beralih ke Dari Internet. Untuk membuat rekaman tersedia di daftar rekaman, alihkan ke pengaturan yang dipilih saat rekaman dibuat. 15 Panduan TV 15.1 Apa yang Anda Perlukan 15.3 Dengan Panduan TV Anda bisa melihat daftar program TV saat ini dan yang dijadwalkan di saluran Anda. Bergantung pada sumber informasi (data) panduan TV, saluran analog dan digital atau hanya saluran digital yang ditampilkan. Tidak semua saluran dilengkapi informasi Panduan TV. Menggunakan Panduan TV Membuka Panduan TV Untuk membuka Panduan TV, tekan TV GUIDE. Panduan TV menunjukkan saluran dari tuner yang dipilih. TV bisa mengumpulkan informasi Panduan TV untuk saluran yang diinstal di TV. TV tidak bisa mengumpulkan informasi Panduan TV untuk saluran yang dilihat dari penerima atau dekoder digital. Tekan TV GUIDE lagi untuk menutupnya. Pertama kali Anda membuka Panduan TV, TV akan memindai semua saluran TV untuk informasi program. Pemindaian ini bisa berlangsung beberapa menit. Data Panduan TV disimpan dalam TV Data Panduan TV Panduan TV menerima informasi (data) dari stasiun penyiaran atau dari Internet. Di beberapa wilayah dan untuk beberapa saluran, informasi Panduan TV mungkin tidak tersedia. TV bisa mengumpulkan informasi Panduan TV untuk saluran yang diinstal di TV. TV tidak bisa mengumpulkan informasi Panduan TV dari saluran yang dilihat dari penerima atau dekoder digital. Mencari Program Dari Panduan TV, Anda dapat beralih ke program saat ini. Untuk beralih ke program (saluran), pilih program dan TV dilengkapi dengan informasi yang diatur ke Dari Stasiun penyiaran. Melihat detail program Jika informasi Panduan TV berasal dari Internet, Panduan TV juga bisa mencantumkan saluran analog di samping saluran digital. Menu Panduan TV juga menampilkan layar kecil dengan saluran saat ini. 1 - Tekan INFO. 2 - Tekan BACK untuk menutupnya. Untuk memunculkan detail program yang dipilih Dari Internet Ubah Hari Jika TV tersambung ke Internet, Anda dapat mengatur TV untuk menerima informasi Panduan TV dari Internet. Panduan TV dapat menampilkan program terjadwal untuk hari-hari yang akan datang (maksimal hingga 8 hari). Untuk mengatur informasi Panduan TV Tekan tombol berwarna Hari dan pilih hari yang diperlukan. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Umum dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Lanjutan > Panduan TV > Dari Internet dan 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Mengatur Pengingat Anda dapat menetapkan pengingat untuk sebuah program. Sebuah pesan akan mengingatkan Anda di awal program. Anda dapat beralih ke saluran ini dengan segera. Rekaman yang hilang Jika beberapa rekaman terlihat hilang dari daftar rekaman, info (data) Panduan TV mungkin berubah. Rekaman yang dibuat dengan pengaturan Dari Stasiun Penyiaran akan hilang dari daftar jika Anda Dalam Panduan TV, program dengan pengingat ditandai dengan sebuah (jam). Untuk mengatur pengingat 65

66 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV dan pilih program yang akan datang. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Atur pengingat dan 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Mengatur Rekaman Anda dapat mengatur rekaman dalam Panduan TV. Untuk melihat daftar rekaman, tekan Rekaman, program yang akan direkam ditandai dengan (titik merah) di bagian depan nama program. Untuk menghapus pengingat 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV dan pilih program dengan pengingat. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Hapus p'ingat dan 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Untuk merekam program 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV dan pilih program yang akan datang atau sedang berlangsung. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekam. 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Untuk membatalkan rekaman Cari menurut Genre 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV dan pilih program yang sebelumnya sudah diatur untuk direkam. 2 - Tekan tombol warna Hapus Rekaman. 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Jika informasi tersedia, Anda dapat melihat program terjadwal menurut genre-nya seperti film, olahraga, dsb. Lihat bab Menjeda TV dan Perekaman untuk informasi selengkapnya. Untuk mencari program berdasarkan genre 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS. 3 - Pilih Cari menurut genre dan 4 - Pilih bahasa yang Anda inginkan dan Daftar dengan program yang ditemukan akan ditampilkan. 5 - Anda dapat membuat pengingat atau menjadwalkan rekaman program terpilih. 6 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang Perekaman, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Perekaman. Tidak tersedia saat memilih saluran DVB-S Daftar Pengingat Anda dapat menampilkan jadwal pengingat yang telah Anda buat. Daftar Pengingat Untuk membuka daftar pengingat 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekaman. 3 - Di bagian atas layar, pilih Terjadwal dan 4 - Dalam daftar jadwal rekaman dan pengingat, pilih tab Pengingat dan tekan OK agar menampilkan hanya pengingat. 5 - Tekan tombol warna Hapus untuk menghapus pengingat yang dipilih. Tekan tombol warna Rekam untuk merekam program yang dipilih. 6 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. 66

67 hanya akan berlangsung selama 30 menit. Anda dapat menyesuaikan waktu akhir perekaman di daftar Perekaman. 16 Perekaman dan Menjeda TV Menjadwalkan Perekaman Anda dapat menjadwalkan perekaman program berikutnya untuk hari ini atau beberapa hari dari hari ini (maksimum 8 hari lagi). TV akan menggunakan data dari Panduan TV untuk memulai dan mengakhiri perekaman Merekam Apa yang Anda Perlukan Untuk merekam program Anda dapat merekam siaran TV digital dan menontonnya nanti. 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Di halaman Panduan TV, pilih saluran dan program yang ingin Anda rekam. Tekan (kanan) atau (kiri) untuk menggulir program dari suatu saluran. Tekan tombol berwarna Hari untuk memilih hari yang diperlukan. 3 - Dengan program yang disorot, tekan tombol berwarna Rekam. Program dijadwalkan untuk direkam. Peringatan akan menunjukkan secara otomatis saat terdapat jadwal yang bertabrakan. Jika Anda berencana untuk merekam program saat Anda tidak ada di depan TV, jangan lupa untuk membiarkan TV dalam keadaan siaga dan Hard Drive USB diaktifkan. 4 - TV menambahkan beberapa margin waktu di akhir program. Anda dapat menyesuaikan margin ini dengan Akhiri Margin Otomatis. 5 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Untuk merekam program TV Anda perlu... Hard Drive USB yang tersambung yang diformat di TV ini saluran TV digital yang terinstal pada TV ini menerima informasi saluran untuk Panduan TV pada layar pengaturan jam TV yang andal. Jika Anda mengatur ulang jam TV secara manual, perekaman bisa gagal. Anda tidak dapat merekam ketika Anda menggunakan Jeda TV. Untuk mematuhi undang-undang hak cipta, beberapa penyedia layanan DVB dapat menerapkan pembatasan yang berbeda dalam hal teknologi DRM (Digital Right Management). Dalam hal siaran saluran yang dilindungi, perekaman, validitas rekaman, atau jumlah tayangan dapat dibatasi. Merekam dapat sepenuhnya dilarang. Jika mencoba merekam siaran yang dilindungi atau memutar rekaman yang kedaluwarsa, sebuah pesan kesalahan dapat muncul. Daftar Rekaman Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang cara memasang Hard Drive USB, di Bantuan tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Hard Drive USB, penginstalan. Anda dapat melihat atau mengatur rekaman Anda di daftar rekaman. Di sebelah daftar rekaman, terdapat daftar terpisah untuk perekaman terjadwal dan pengingat. Catatan: Fungsi perekaman hanya untuk siaran TV digital. Konten dari perangkat eksternal (misalnya HDMI) tidak dapat direkam. Untuk membuka daftar rekaman. 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekaman. 3 - Di daftar rekaman, pilih tab Baru, Ditonton atau Kedaluwarsa dan tekan OK untuk memfilter tontonan Anda. 4 - Dengan rekaman yang dipilih pada daftar, Anda dapat menghapus rekaman dengan tombol berwarna Hapus atau menghentikan rekaman yang sedang berlangsung dengan tombol berwarna Hentikan Rekaman. Anda dapat mengganti nama rekaman dengan tombol berwarna Ganti nama. 5 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Merekam Program Merekam Sekarang Untuk merekam program yang Anda tonton, tekan (Rekam) di remote control. Perekaman akan segera dimulai. Untuk menghentikan perekaman, tekan (Berhenti). Stasiun penyiaran dapat membatasi jumlah hari suatu rekaman dapat dilihat. Ketika periode ini berakhir, rekaman akan ditandai sebagai kedaluwarsa. Rekaman di daftar dapat menunjukkan jumlah hari sebelum rekaman kedaluwarsa. Ketika data Panduan TV tersedia, program yang Anda tonton akan disimpan dari saat Anda menekan tombol perekaman sampai program berakhir. Jika tidak ada data Panduan TV yang tersedia, perekaman 67

68 Jika perekaman terjadwal dicegah oleh stasiun penyiaran atau jika siaran terganggu, rekaman ditandai sebagai Gagal. Ketika dua perekaman yang terjadwal bertabrakan waktunya, terjadi konflik rekaman. Untuk mengatasi konflik perekaman, Anda dapat menyesuaikan waktu mulai dan berakhir dari salah satu atau kedua rekaman terjadwal. 4 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Jadwal dan 5 - Pilih tuner dari tempat Anda ingin merekam dan 6 - Pilih saluran yang akan direkam dan 7 - Pilih hari perekaman dan 8 - Atur waktu mulai dan akhir perekaman. Pilih salah satu tombol dan gunakan tombol (naik) atau (turun) untuk mengatur jam dan menit. 9 - Pilih Rekam dan tekan OK untuk menjadwalkan perekaman manual. Untuk menyesuaikan waktu mulai dan akhir dari suatu perekaman terjadwal... Rekaman akan muncul dalam daftar perekaman terjadwal dan pengingat. Konflik Perekaman 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekaman. 3 - Di bagian atas layar, pilih Terjadwal dan 4 - Di daftar perekaman terjadwal dan pengingat, pilih tab Pengingat dan tekan OK untuk menampilkan perekaman terjadwal saja. 5 - Pilih perekaman terjadwal yang bertabrakan dengan perekaman terjadwal lain dan tekan tombol berwarna Sesuaikan Waktu. 6 - Pilih waktu mulai dan akhir dan ubah waktu dengan tombol (naik) atau (turun). Pilih Terapkan dan 7 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Menonton Rekaman Untuk menonton rekaman 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekaman. 3 - Di daftar rekaman, pilih rekaman yang Anda perlukan dan tekan OK untuk mulai menonton. 4 - Anda dapat menggunakan tombol (jeda), (putar), (mundur), (maju cepat) atau (berhenti). 5 - Untuk beralih kembali untuk menonton TV, tekan EXIT. Margin Akhir Otomatis 16.2 Menjeda TV Anda dapat mengatur margin waktu yang TV akan tambahkan secara otomatis di akhir setiap rekaman terjadwal. Apa yang Anda Perlukan Untuk mengatur margin waktu akhir otomatis Anda dapat menghentikan sementara siaran TV digital dan melanjutkan menonton nanti. 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekaman. 3 - Tekan OPTIONS dan pilih Margin Akhir Otomatis lalu 4 - Tekan (naik) atau (turun) dan tekan OK untuk mengatur margin waktu yang ditambahkan ke rekaman secara otomatis. Anda dapat menambahkan hingga 45 menit untuk rekaman. 5 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Untuk menjeda program TV Anda perlu... Hard Drive USB yang tersambung yang diformat di TV ini saluran TV digital yang terinstal pada TV ini menerima informasi saluran untuk Panduan TV pada layar Dengan Hard drive USB yang tersambung dan terformat, TV terus menyimpan siaran TV yang Anda tonton. Saat beralih ke saluran lain, siaran saluran sebelumnya dihapus. Juga saat Anda mengubah TV ke siaga, siaran terhapus. Perekaman Manual Anda dapat menjadwalkan perekaman yang tidak ditautkan dengan program TV. Anda mengatur jenis tuner, saluran dan waktu mulai dan akhir sendiri. Anda tidak dapat menggunakan Jeda TV saat Anda merekam. Untuk informasi selengkapnya, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Hard Drive USB, penginstalan. Untuk menjadwalkan perekaman secara manual Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekaman. 3 - Di bagian atas layar, pilih Terjadwal dan 68

69 Menjeda Program Untuk menjeda dan melanjutkan siaran... Untuk menjeda siaran, tekan (Jeda). Panel kemajuan di bawah layar muncul secara singkat. Untuk memunculkan panel kemajuan, tekan (Jeda) kembali. Untuk melanjutkan, tekan (Putar). Dengan panel kemajuan di layar, tekan (Mundur) atau tekan (Maju) untuk memilih dari tempat Anda ingin mulai melihat siaran yang dijeda. Tekan tombol ini berulang kali untuk mengubah kecepatan. Anda dapat menjeda siaran untuk jangka waktu maksimal 90 menit. Untuk beralih kembali ke siaran TV langsung, tekan (Berhenti). Memutar Ulang Selama TV menyimpan siaran yang Anda tonton, Anda dapat memutar ulang sebagian besar siaran selama beberapa detik. Untuk memutar ulang siaran saat ini Tekan (Jeda) 2 - Tekan (Mundur). Anda dapat menekan secara berulang kali untuk memilih dari mana Anda ingin mulai melihat siaran yang dijeda. Tekan tombol ini berulang kali untuk mengubah kecepatan. Pada satu titik Anda akan mencapai permulaan penyimpanan siaran atau jangka waktu maksimum. 3 - Tekan (Putar) untuk melihat siaran kembali. 4 - Tekan (Berhenti) untuk menonton siaran secara langsung. 69

70 17 Memproyeksikan ke TV Anda... Smartphone dan Tablet Untuk memproyeksikan aplikasi ke layar TV Aplikasi Remote TV Philips 1 - Di smartphone atau tablet Anda, buka aplikasi yang mendukung Google Cast. 2 - Ketuk ikon Google Cast. 3 - Pilih TV yang ingin dijadikan tujuan proyeksi. 4 - Tekan putar pada smartphone atau tablet Anda. Apa yang Anda pilih akan mulai diputar di TV. Aplikasi Remote TV Philips yang baru di smartphone atau tablet Anda adalah sahabat baru TV Anda Dengan Aplikasi Remote TV, Anda menguasai media di sekitar Anda. Kirim foto, musik, atau video ke layar TV besar Anda atau tonton salah satu saluran TV secara langsung di tablet atau ponsel Anda. Cari yang ingin Anda tonton di Panduan TV dan tonton di ponsel atau TV. Dengan Aplikasi Remote TV, Anda bisa menggunakan ponsel sebagai remote control. AirPlay Untuk menambahkan fungsi AirPlay ke TV Android, Anda bisa mengunduh dan menginstal salah satu aplikasi Android yang memiliki fungsi tersebut. Anda bisa menemukan beberapa aplikasi ini di Google Play Store. Unduh Aplikasi Remote TV Philips dari app store favorit Anda Aplikasi Remote TV Philips tersedia gratis untuk ios dan Android. MHL TV ini kompatibel dengan MHL Jika perangkat seluler Anda juga kompatibel dengan MHL, Anda bisa menyambungkan perangkat seluler ke TV dengan kabel MHL. Dengan menyambungkan kabel MHL, Anda bisa menampilkan apa yang ada di perangkat seluler di layar TV. Baterai perangkat seluler Anda juga akan diisi dayanya. Sambungan MHL cocok untuk menonton film atau bermain game dari perangkat seluler Anda di TV dalam waktu yang lebih lama. Google Cast Apa yang Anda Perlukan Jika aplikasi di perangkat seluler Anda memiliki Google Cast, Anda bisa memproyeksikan aplikasi Anda di TV ini. Di aplikasi seluler, cari ikon Google Cast. Anda bisa menggunakan perangkat seluler untuk mengontrol apa yang ada di TV. Google Cast bisa digunakan di Android dan ios. Mengisi Daya Perangkat seluler Anda harus disambungkan ke jaringan rumah Wi-Fi yang sama seperti TV. Dengan menyambungkan kabel MHL, perangkat Anda akan terisi dayanya saat TV dinyalakan (tidak dalam mode siaga). Aplikasi dengan Google Cast Kabel MHL Aplikasi Google Cast baru selalu tersedia. Anda bisa mencobanya dengan YouTube, Chrome, Netflix, Photowall atau Big Web Quiz untuk Chromecast. Lihat juga google.com/cast Anda memerlukan kabel MHL pasif (HDMI ke Micro USB) untuk menyambungkan perangkat seluler ke TV. Anda mungkin memerlukan adaptor ekstra untuk menyambung ke perangkat seluler Anda. Untuk menyambungkan kabel MHL ke TV, gunakan sambungan HDMI 1 MHL. Beberapa produk dan fitur Google Play tidak tersedia di semua negara. Dapatkan informasi selengkapnya di support.google.com/androidtv MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link dan Logo MHL adalah merek dagang atau merek dagang terdaftar dari MHL, LLC. 70

71 18 Dari Konsol Permainan Permainan Untuk memulai permainan dari Konsol Permainan 1 - Aktifkan Konsol Permainan. 2 - Tekan SOURCES dan pilih konsol permainan atau nama sambungan. 3 - Mulai permainan. 4 - Tekan BACK berulang kali atau tekan EXIT atau hentikan aplikasi dengan tombol keluar/henti khususnya Apa yang Anda Perlukan Di TV ini, Anda dapat bermain permainan dari Galeri Aplikasi di menu Awal dari Google Play Store di menu Awal dari Konsol Permainan yang tersambung Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang menyambungkan Konsol Permainan, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Konsol Permainan, sambungkan. Permainan dari Galeri Aplikasi atau Google Play Store harus diunduh dan diinstal di TV sebelum Anda dapat bermain pemainan. Beberapa permainan memerlukan gamepad untuk memainkannya. Untuk menginstal aplikasi permainan dari Galeri Aplikasi Philips atau Google Play Store, TV harus tersambung ke Internet. Anda harus menyetujui Ketentuan Penggunaan untuk menggunakan aplikasi dari Galeri Aplikasi. Anda harus sign in dengan Akun Google untuk menggunakan aplikasi Google Play dan Google Play Store Gamepad Untuk bermain permainan dari Internet di TV ini, Anda dapat menyambungkan berbagai pilihan Gamepad nirkabel. TV bisa mendukung 2 Gamepad yang tersambung secara bersamaan. Saat Anda menyambungkan Gamepad, Anda bisa segera menggunakannya. Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang menyambungkan gamepad, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Gamepad, sambungkan Bermain Permainan Dari menu Awal Untuk memulai permainan dari menu Awal 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah ke Permainan, pilih permainan dan 3 - Tekan BACK berulang kali atau tekan EXIT atau hentikan aplikasi dengan tombol keluar/henti khususnya. 71

72 Retro - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Spektrum - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Pemindai - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Irama - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Party - Campuran semua gaya Ikuti Audio, satu per satu 19 Ambilight 19.1 Gaya Ambilight Ikuti Video Ikuti Warna Anda bisa mengatur Ambilight untuk mengikuti dinamika video atau audio program TV. Atau, Anda bisa mengatur Ambilight untuk menampilkan gaya warna preset atau Anda bisa menonaktifkan Ambilight. Anda bisa mengatur Ambilight untuk mengikuti dinamika video atau audio program TV. Atau, Anda bisa mengatur Ambilight untuk menampilkan gaya warna preset atau Anda bisa menonaktifkan Ambilight. Jika Anda memilih Ikuti Video, Anda bisa memilih salah satu gaya yang mengikuti dinamika gambar di layar TV. Jika Anda memilih Ikuti Warna, Anda dapat memilih salah satu gaya warna preset. Untuk menetapkan Gaya Ambilight Untuk menetapkan Gaya Ambilight 1 - Tekan AMBILIGHT. 2 - Pilih Ikuti Warna dan 3 - Pilih gaya yang Anda inginkan dan 4 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. 1 - Tekan AMBILIGHT. 2 - Pilih Ikuti Video dan 3 - Pilih gaya yang Anda inginkan dan 4 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Gaya Ikuti Warna yang tersedia adalah Gaya Ikuti Video yang tersedia adalah Lava Panas - Variasi warna merah Kedalaman Air - Variasi warna biru Alam Segar - Variasi warna hijau Putih hangat - Warna statis Putih Dingin - Warna statis Standar - Ideal untuk menonton TV sehari-hari Alami - Mengikuti gambar atau suara senyata mungkin Sepak bola - Ideal untuk permainan sepak bola Tajam - Ideal untuk kondisi siang hari Permainan - Ideal untuk permainan Nyaman - Ideal untuk malam hari yang sunyi Rileks - Ideal untuk nuansa ruang santai Ikuti Aplikasi Anda bisa mengatur Ambilight untuk mengikuti dinamika video atau audio program TV. Atau, Anda bisa mengatur Ambilight untuk menampilkan gaya warna preset atau Anda bisa menonaktifkan Ambilight. Ikuti Audio Anda bisa mengatur Ambilight untuk mengikuti dinamika video atau audio program TV. Atau, Anda bisa mengatur Ambilight untuk menampilkan gaya warna preset atau Anda bisa menonaktifkan Ambilight. Pengaturan Ikuti Aplikasi tersedia bila Anda mengontrol Ambilight menggunakan aplikasi Jika Anda memilih Ikuti Audio, Anda bisa memilih salah satu gaya yang mengikuti dinamika suara. Ambilight Nonaktif Untuk menetapkan Gaya Ambilight Untuk menonaktifkan Ambilight 1 - Tekan AMBILIGHT. 2 - Pilih Ikuti Audio dan 3 - Pilih gaya yang Anda inginkan dan 4 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. 1 - Tekan AMBILIGHT. 2 - Pilih Tidak aktif dan 3 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Gaya Ikuti Video yang tersedia adalah Lumina - Mencampur dinamika audio dengan warna video Warna-warni - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio 72

73 19.3 Pengaturan Ambilight Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Ambilight, Pengaturan untuk informasi selengkapnya. 73

74 Tentang Pilihan Teratas TV harus memiliki penginstalan saluran. TV ini harus tersambung ke Internet. jam TV harus diatur ke Otomatis atau Tergantung Negara. Anda harus menerima Ketentuan penggunaan (Anda mungkin sudah menerimanya saat tersambung ke Internet.). Dengan Pilihan Teratas, TV Anda menyarankan Ikon hanya akan muncul di bagian atas layar saat Sekarang di TV tersedia. 20 Pilihan Teratas 20.1 program TV saat ini di Sekarang di TV layanan TV online (Catch Up TV) di TV on Demand video rental terbaru di Video on Demand layanan TV online (Catch Up TV) dari Freeview di Freeview Play TV tidak menyimpan rekomendasi sebelumnya. Menggunakan Sekarang di TV Untuk menikmati Pilihan Teratas, sambungkan TV ke Internet. Pastikan Anda menyetujui Ketentuan Penggunaannya. Informasi dan layanan Pilihan Teratas hanya tersedia di negara-negara terpilih. Untuk membuka Sekarang di TV 1 - Tekan TOP PICKS untuk membuka menu Pilihan Teratas. 2 - Pilih Sekarang di TV di bagian atas layar dan 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutupnya. Ketentuan Penggunaan Untuk memungkinkan TV memberikan rekomendasi ini, Anda harus menyetujui Ketentuan Penggunaan. Untuk mendapatkan rekomendasi yang disesuaikan kebiasaan menonton Anda, pastikan Anda mencentang kotak Memilih Berlangganan Layanan Rekomendasi Pribadi. Saat Anda membuka Sekarang di TV, TV mungkin perlu beberapa detik untuk menyegarkan informasi halaman. Di Sekarang di TV Anda dapat memilih dan menekan OK pada ikon program untuk mencari program yang sedang dilihat. memilih dan menekan OK pada ikon program terjadwal untuk mencari saluran tersebut. Untuk membuka Ketentuan Penggunaan 1 - Tekan TOP PICKS. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Ketentuan Penggunaan dan 3 - Pilih Pengaturan Privasi, dan 4 - Pilih Memilih Berlangganan Layanan Rekomendasi Pribadi dan tekan OK untuk mencentang kotak. Tekan OK lagi untuk menghapus centang. 5 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Anda dapat menggunakan tombol berwarna pada remote control untuk memulai, menghentikan, atau menghapus perekaman terjadwal. Anda juga dapat mengatur atau menghapus pengingat yang memperingatkan saat suatu program dimulai. Untuk membiarkan Sekarang di TV tanpa mencari saluran lainnya, tekan BACK Sekarang di TV TV on Demand Tentang Sekarang di TV Tentang TV on Demand Dengan Sekarang di TV, TV merekomendasikan 10 program paling populer untuk ditonton saat ini. Dengan TV on Demand, Anda dapat menonton program TV yang Anda lewatkan atau menonton program favorit setiap kali itu sesuai. Layanan ini disebut juga Catch Up TV, Replay TV atau Online TV. Program yang tersedia di TV on Demand bisa ditonton secara gratis. TV merekomendasikan program di TV sekarang atau dimulai dalam 15 menit. Program yang direkomendasikan dipilih dari saluran yang Anda instal. Pilihan dibuat dari saluran pilihan Anda. Selain itu, Anda dapat memungkinkan Sekarang di TV melakukan beberapa rekomendasi yang dipersonalisasi untuk Anda, berdasarkan program yang Anda tonton secara reguler. Untuk menyediakan Sekarang di TV Anda dapat membiarkan TV on Demand melakukan rekomendasi program yang dipersonalisasi, berdasarkan pemasangan TV dan program yang Anda tonton secara teratur. informasi Sekarang di TV harus tersedia di negara Anda. Ikon hanya akan muncul di bagian atas layar saat TV on Demand tersedia. 74

75 4 - Tekan BACK untuk menutupnya. Menggunakan TV on Demand Saat Anda membuka Video on Demand, TV mungkin perlu beberapa detik untuk menyegarkan informasi halaman. Untuk membuka TV on Demand 1 - Tekan TOP PICKS untuk membuka menu Pilihan Teratas. 2 - Pilih TV on Demand di bagian atas layar dan 3 - Tekan (turun) untuk membuka halaman dalam format layar penuh. 4 - Anda dapat memilih stasiun penyiaran tertentu jika tersedia lebih dari satu pilihan. 5 - Pilih ikon program dan tekan OK untuk mulai menonton. 6 - Tekan BACK untuk menutupnya. Anda dapat memilih toko video tertentu jika tersedia lebih dari satu pilihan. Untuk menyewa film 1 - Pindahkan sorotan pada poster film. Info terbatas akan ditampilkan setelah beberapa detik. 2 - Tekan OK untuk membuka halaman film toko video untuk melihat sinopsis suatu film. 3 - Konfirmasi pesanan Anda. 4 - Lakukan pembayaran di TV. 5 - Mulai tonton. Anda dapat menggunakan tombol (Putar) dan (Jeda). Saat Anda membuka TV on Demand, TV mungkin perlu beberapa detik untuk menyegarkan informasi halaman. Setelah program dimulai, Anda dapat menggunakan tombol (Putar) dan (Jeda) Tentang Freeview Play Freeview Play Video on Demand Untuk menikmati Freeview Play, Anda harus menyambungkan TV ke Internet terlebih dahulu. Tentang Video on Demand Freeview Play menawarkan: Menonton program TV yang Anda lewatkan dari tujuh hari terakhir Menonton siaran live TV dan on demand, di satu tempat tanpa perlu masuk ke aplikasi, Anda dapat mencari program Freeview Play di Panduan TV dan Pilihan Teratas. Menonton lebih dari 60 saluran standar dan hingga 15 saluran HD Menikmati layanan on demand, seperti BBC iplayer, ITV Hub, All 4, Demand 5, dan UKTV Play Tanpa kontrak dan biaya bulanan, Anda memiliki kendali penuh Dengan Video on Demand, Anda dapat menyewa film dari toko video rental online. Anda dapat membiarkan Video on Demand melakukan rekomendasi film yang dipersonalisasi, berdasarkan negara Anda, pemasangan TV, dan program yang Anda tonton secara teratur. Ikon hanya akan muncul di bagian atas layar saat Video on Demand tersedia. Pembayaran Saat menyewa atau membeli film, Anda dapat membayar toko video secara aman dengan kartu kredit. Sebagian besar toko video meminta Anda membuat akun login saat pertama kali menyewa film. Untuk detail, silakan kunjungi: Freeview Play hanya untuk model UK. Trafik Internet Melakukan streaming banyak video bisa membuat Anda melebihi batas trafik Internet bulanan. Menggunakan Freeview Play Untuk membuka Freeview Play Menggunakan Video on Demand 1 - Tekan TOP PICKS untuk membuka menu Pilihan Teratas. 2 - Pilih Freeview Play di bagian atas layar dan 3 - Anda dapat mengurutkan beberapa jenis program yang berbeda dengan memilih genre tertentu di bagian atas. 4 - Pilih program dan tekan OK untuk mulai menonton. 5 - Tekan BACK untuk menutupnya. Untuk membuka Video on Demand 1 - Tekan TOP PICKS untuk membuka menu Pilihan Teratas. 2 - Pilih Video on Demand di bagian atas layar dan 3 - Gunakan tombol navigasi untuk memilih poster film. 75

76 Freeview Play hanya untuk model UK. 76

77 21 tanpa memulai apa pun. Menu Awal Profil Terbatas Tentang Menu Awal Anda dapat membatasi penggunaan aplikasi tertentu dengan mengalihkan TV ke profil terbatas. Profil yang dibatasi ini hanya akan mengizinkan penggunaan aplikasi yang telah Anda pilih. Anda hanya dapat keluar dari profil ini dengan kode PIN. Untuk benar-benar menikmati keunggulan TV Android Anda, hubungkan TV ke Internet. Seperti pada smartphone atau tablet Android Anda, menu Awal adalah pusat TV Anda. Dari menu Awal Anda dapat memulai aplikasi apa saja, beralih saluran TV, menyewa film, membuka situs web, atau beralih ke perangkat yang tersambung. Bergantung pada konfigurasi TV dan negara Anda, menu Awal dapat berisi item yang berbeda. Dengan TV yang dialihkan ke profil terbatas, Anda tidak dapat Menemukan atau membuka aplikasi yang ditandai sebagai Tidak diizinkan Mengakses Google Play Store Membeli melalui Google Play Movies & TV, dan Google Play Games Menggunakan aplikasi pihak ketiga yang tidak menggunakan sign-in Google Menu Awal ditata berderet Rekomendasi Deret pertama menunjukkan video populer, video musik, atau hits di Internet. Anda dapat mengatur pengaturan Privasi dalam Ketentuan Penggunaan berdasarkan pada kebiasaan menonton Anda. Dengan TV yang dialihkan ke profil terbatas, Anda dapat Melihat konten yang sudah disewa atau dibeli dari Google Play Movies & TV Bermain permainan yang sudah dibeli dan dipasang dari Google Play Games Mengakses pengaturan berikut ini: Jaringan Wi-Fi, Ucapan dan Aksesibilitas Menambah aksesori Bluetooth Koleksi Philips Baris ini berisi saran dari Aplikasi. Aplikasi Deret Aplikasi berisi semua Aplikasi yang disertakan bersama TV dan Aplikasi yang Anda unduh sendiri dari Google Play. Dalam deret ini Anda juga akan menemukan Aplikasi untuk TV, seperti Tonton TV, Sumber, Media, dan lainnya. Aplikasi yang baru saja Anda gunakan akan ditampilkan di deret depan. Akun Google pada TV akan tetap log in. Penggunaan profil terbatas tidak mengubah Akun Google. Permainan Dari sini, Anda dapat memulai permainan di TV. Jika Anda mengunduh permainan, permainan tersebut akan muncul di deret ini. Pengaturan Dari sini, Anda dapat membuka berbagai pengaturan. Agar dapat menemukan semua pengaturan, tekan dan pilih Semua Pengaturan. Anda juga dapat membuka Bantuan dari sini. Lihat juga Membuka menu Awal Untuk membuka menu Awal dan membuka item 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Pilih item dan tekan OK untuk membuka atau memulainya. 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu Awal 77

78 22 Netflix Jika berlangganan keanggotaan Netflix, Anda dapat menikmati Netflix di TV ini. TV Anda harus tersambung ke Internet. Netflix mungkin hanya tersedia dengan pembaruan perangkat lunak di masa depan untuk wilayah Anda. Untuk membuka Netflix, tekan untuk membuka Aplikasi Netflix. Anda dapat segera membuka Netflix dari TV saat siaga. 78

79 Pilih USB dan tekan Perangkat lunak Mengidentifikasi TV 1 - Masukkan flash drive USB ke salah satu sambungan USB TV. 2 - Pilih Tulis ke USB dan File identifikasi tertulis pada flash drive USB Perbarui Perangkat Lunak OK. Unduh perangkat lunak 1 - Masukkan flash drive USB ke komputer Anda. 2 - Di perangkat flash drive USB, cari file update.htm dan klik dua kali. 3 - Klik Kirim ID. 4 - Jika tersedia perangkat lunak baru, unduh file zip. 5 - Setelah diunduh, buka zip file dan salin file autorun.upg ke flash drive USB. Jangan letakkan file ini di dalam folder. Perbarui dari Internet Jika TV tersambung ke Internet, Anda mungkin menerima pesan untuk memperbarui perangkat lunak TV. Anda memerlukan koneksi Internet berkecepatantinggi (broadband). Jika Anda menerima pesan ini, sebaiknya lakukan pembaruan. Perbarui perangkat lunak TV 1 - Masukkan flash drive USB ke TV lagi. Pembaruan dimulai secara otomatis. 2 - Pembaruan perangkat lunak bisa berlangsung beberapa menit. Jangan tekan tombol pada TV atau remote control. Jangan lepaskan flash drive USB. 3 - Jika pembaruan selesai, TV akan kembali ke saluran yang tadinya Anda tonton. Dengan pesan muncul di layar, pilih Perbarui dan ikuti petunjuk di layar. Anda juga bisa mencari pembaruan perangkat lunak sendiri. Selama pembaruan perangkat lunak, tidak ada gambar dan TV akan mati dan nyala kembali. Ini mungkin terjadi beberapa kali. Pembaruan ini akan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit. Tunggu hingga gambar TV kembali muncul. Jangan tekan tombol daya pada TV atau pada remote control selama pembaruan perangkat lunak. Jika terjadi listrik mati saat pembaruan, jangan sekalikali melepas flash drive USB dari TV. Ketika daya listrik menyala kembali, pembaruan akan dilanjutkan. Untuk mencegah pembaruan perangkat lunak TV yang tidak disengaja, hapus file autorun.upg dari flash drive USB. Untuk mencari tahu pembaruan perangkat lunak sendiri 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Perbarui Prgkt Lunak > Cari Pembaruan dan 3 - Pilih Internet dan 4 - TV akan mencari pembaruan di Internet. 5 - Jika pembaruan tersedia, Anda bisa langsung memperbarui perangkat lunak. 6 - Pembaruan perangkat lunak bisa berlangsung beberapa menit. Jangan tekan tombol pada TV atau remote control. 7 - Jika pembaruan selesai, TV akan kembali ke saluran yang tadinya Anda tonton Versi Perangkat Lunak Untuk melihat versi perangkat lunak TV saat ini 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Perbarui Prgkt Lunak > Info Perangkat Lunak Saat Ini dan 3 - Versi, catatan rilis dan tanggal pembuatan akan ditampilkan. Selain itu, Nomor ESN Netflix juga ditampilkan, jika ada. 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Perbarui dari USB Mungkin perangkat lunak TV perlu diperbarui Anda memerlukan komputer dengan koneksi Internet berkecepatan-tinggi dan flash drive USB untuk mengunggah perangkat lunak di TV. Gunakan flash drive USB dengan ruang kosong minimal 2 GB. Pastikan perlindungan tulis dinonaktifkan. Pembaruan Perangkat Lunak Otomatis Untuk mengaktifkan Pembaruan perangkat lunak otomatis agar dapat memperbarui perangkat lunak TV Anda secara otomatis. Biarkan TV dalam mode siaga. Untuk memperbarui perangkat lunak TV 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Perbarui Prgkt Lunak > Cari Pembaruan dan 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Perbarui Prgkt Lunak > Pembaruan 79

80 Perangkat Lunak Otomatis dan 3 - Ikuti petunjuk pada layar. 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Netherlands B.V. yang Anda beli. Hal itu hanya berlaku pada kode sumber ini, yang disediakan untuk Anda. Jika pengaturan ini diaktifkan, pemutakhiran akan diunduh ketika TV dihidupkan dan diinstal 15 menit setelah TV masuk mode siaga (selama tidak ada rekaman atau alarm lain yang terjadwal). Jika pengaturan dinonaktifkan, pesan layar "Upgrade Now" / "Later" akan ditampilkan. Open Source Android (7.1.1) This tv contains the Android Nougat Software. Android is a Linux-based operating system designed primarily for touchscreen mobile devices such as smartphones and tablet computers. This software will also be reused in TPVision Android based TV's. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache license version 2, which can be found below. Android APACHE License Version 2 ( ). This includes all external sources used by official Android AOSP Perangkat Lunak Sumber Terbuka Televisi ini menggunakan perangkat lunak sumber terbuka. TP Vision Europe B.V. dengan ini menawarkan, berdasarkan permintaan, untuk memberikan salinan kode sumber lengkap yang sesuai untuk paket perangkat lunak Sumber Terbuka berhak cipta yang digunakan dalam produk ini di mana tawaran tersebut diminta oleh lisensi yang sesuai. linux kernel ( ) This tv contains the Linux Kernel. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can be found below. Additionally, following exception applies: "NOTE! This copyright does not cover user programs that use kernel services by normal system calls - this is merely considered normal use of the kernel, and does not fall under the heading of "derived work". Also note that the GPL below is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, but the instance of code that it refers to (the linux kernel) is copyrighted by me and others who actually wrote it. Also note that the only valid version of the GPL as far as the kernel is concerned is _this_ particular version of the license (ie v2, not v2.2 or v3.x or whatever), unless explicitly otherwise stated. Linus Torvalds" Tawaran ini berlaku hingga tiga tahun setelah pembelian produk bagi siapa pun yang menerima informasi ini. Untuk mendapatkan kode sumber, kirimkan surat dalam bahasa Inggris kepada... open.source@tpvision.com 23.5 Lisensi Sumber Terbuka Tentang Lisensi Sumber Terbuka README untuk kode sumber dari bagian perangkat lunak TV TP Vision Netherlands B.V. yang berada di bawah lisensi sumber terbuka. Ini adalah dokumen yang menjelaskan distribusi kode sumber yang digunakan pada TV TP Vision Netherlands B.V., yang berada di bawah GNU General Public License (GPL) atau GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), atau lisensi sumber terbuka lainnya. Instruksi untuk mendapatkan salinan perangkat lunak ini dapat ditemukan di Petunjuk Penggunaan. libcurl (7.50.1) libcurl is a free and easy-to-use client-side URL transfer library, supporting DICT, FILE, FTP, FTPS, Gopher, HTTP, HTTPS, IMAP, IMAPS, LDAP, LDAPS, POP3, POP3S, RTMP, RTSP, SCP, SFTP, SMTP, SMTPS, Telnet and TFTP. libcurl supports SSL certificates, HTTP POST, HTTP PUT, FTP uploading, HTTP form based upload, proxies, cookies, user+password authentication (Basic, Digest, NTLM, Negotiate, Kerberos), file transfer resume, http proxy tunneling and more! The original download site for this software is : COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright (c) , TP Vision Netherlands B.V. TIDAK MENJAMIN APA PUN, BAIK TERSURAT MAUPUN TERSIRAT, TERMASUK GARANSI PENJUALAN ATAU KELAYAKAN UNTUK TUJUAN TERTENTU, MENGENAI PERANGKAT LUNAK INI. TP Vision Netherlands B.V. tidak menawarkan dukungan untuk perangkat lunak ini. Bagian sebelumnya tidak memengaruhi jaminan dan hak hukum mengenai produk TP Vision 80

81 Daniel Stenberg, All rights reserved. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. INNO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USEOR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, not just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us. Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group's software". We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. libpngex (1.4.1) libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG) reference library (originally called pnglib). It is a platform-independent library that contains C functions for handling PNG images. It supports almost all of PNG's features, is extensible. The original download site for this software is : license libfreetypeex (2.4.2) FreeType is a software development library, available in source and binary forms, used to render text on to bitmaps and provides support for other font-related operations. The original download site for this software is : Freetype License dvbsnoop (1.2) dvbsnoop is a DVB / MPEG stream analyzer program. For generating CRC32 values required for composing PAT, PMT, EIT sections The original download site for this software is : /src/misc/crc32.cgpl v2 libjpegex (8a) This package contains C software to implement JPEG image encoding, decoding, and transcoding. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. This software is provided "AS IS", and you, its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy. This software is copyright (C) , Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as specified below. Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:(1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this README file must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation.(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must state that "this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group".(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user gsoap (2.7.15) The gsoap toolkit is an open source C and C++ software development toolkit for SOAP/XML Web services and generic (non-soap) C/C++ XML data bindings. Part of the software embedded in this product is gsoap software. Portions created by gsoap are Copyright Robert A. van Engelen, Genivia inc. All Rights Reserved. THE SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART PROVIDED BY GENIVIA INC AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, 81

82 STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. is licensed by Brian Gladman. libupnp (1.2.1) The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. restlet (2.3.0) Restlet is a lightweight, comprehensive, open source REST framework for the Java platform. Restlet is suitable for both server and client Web applications. It supports major Internet transport, data format, and service description standards like HTTP and HTTPS, SMTP, XML, JSON, Atom, and WADL. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache License version 2. live555 (0.82) Live555 provides RTP/RTCP/RTSP client.the original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the LGPL v2.1 license, which can be found below. dnsmasq FaceBook SDK (3.0.1) Dnsmasq is a lightweight, easy to configure DNS forwarder and DHCP server. The original download site for this software is : dnmasq This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can be found below. This TV contains Facebook SDK. The Facebook SDK for Android is the easiest way to integrate your Android app with Facebook's platform. The SDK provides support for Login with Facebook authentication, reading and writing to Facebook APIs and support for UI elements such as pickers and dialogs. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache License version 2. TomCrypt (1.1) iwedia stack is using tomcrypt for sw decryption. The original download site for this software is : 3/libtomcrypt.3.html. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the WTFPL. ffmpeg (2.1.3) This TV uses FFmpeg. FFmpeg is a complete, crossplatform solution to record, convert and stream audio and video. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can be found below. u-boot ( ) U-boot is a boot loader for embedded boards based on ARM, MIPS and other processors, which can be installed in a boot ROM and used to initialize and test the hardware or to download and run application code. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can be found below. gson (2.3) This TV uses gson. Gson is a Java library that can be used to convert Java Objects into their JSON representation. It can also be used to convert a JSON string to an equivalent Java object. Gson can work with arbitrary Java objects including pre-existing objects that you do not have source-code of. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache License 2.0 AsyncHttpclient (1.4.9) The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 This software includes an implementation of the AES Cipher, licensed by Brian Gladman. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software httpclient ( ) 82

83 This is needed to import cz.msebera.android.httpclient used by AssyncHttpClientThe original download site for this software is : d/httpclient/ This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 BSD. Jackson Parser (2.x) libjpeg (3.4.0) Ipepg client uses Jackson Parser for string manipulation. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 libjpeg-turbo is a JPEG image codec that uses SIMD instructions (MMX, SSE2, NEON) to accelerate baseline JPEG compression and decompression on x86, x86-64, and ARM systems. The original download site for this software is : is covered by three compatible BSD-style open source licenses. Refer to LICENSE.txt for a roll-up of license terms. libiprouteutil (3.4.0) iproute2 TCP/IP networking and traffic control. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2. which can be found below audio a2dp (2.x) Bluetooth stack. The original download site for this software is : bt This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 libmtp (1.0.1) libmtp The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the LGPL V2. libexif (0.6.21) libmdnssd ( ) Exif JPEG header manipulation tool. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 MDNS Responder. The mdnsresponder project is a component of Bonjour, 5Apple's ease-of-use IP networking initiative. The original download site for this software is : sponder/ This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache license version 2 libexpat (2.1.0) Expat XML Parser. The original download site for this software is : is free software. You may copy, distribute, and modify it under the terms of the License contained in the file COPYING distributed with this package. This license is the same as the MIT/X Consortium license. libnfc_ndef ( ) The original download site for this software is : No info. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache license version 2 libfftem ( ) neven face recognition library. The original download site for this software is : No info. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 libskia ( ) skia 2D graphics library Skia is a complete 2D graphic library for drawing Text, Geometries, and Images. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. libicui18n (49.1.1) International Components for unicode. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the libsonivox ( ) 83

84 The original download site for this software is : No info. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2. program. It encapsulates the functionality of many common Linux commands (and some special Android ones) into a single binary. This makes it more compact than having all those other commands installed individually. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2. libsqlite (3.9.2) SQLite database. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2. libssl (7b8b9c17db93ea b437c77fb36eeb81b31) libttspico ( ) BoringSSL The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. The original download site for this software is : No info. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2. libopenmaxal (7b8b9c17db93ea b437c77fb36eeb81b31) libtinyalsa ( ) tinyalsa: a small library to interface with ALSA in the Linux kernel. The original download site for this software is : No info. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. OpenMAX AL is an application-level multimedia playback and recording API for mobile embedded devicesthe original download site for this software is : License free wpa_supplicant (0.8) libopensles (1.0) Library used by legacy HAL to talk to wpa_supplicant daemon. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPLv2. Khronos OpenSL Sound API spec. The original download site for this software is : License free libegl libglesv1_cm (3.1) libz (1.2.8) Khronos OpenGL Graphics API spec. The original download site for this software is : License free zlib compression library. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. libffmpeg_av (2.1) FFmpeg media player. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is licensed under LGPL v2.1 iptables (1.4.20) iptables is a user space application program that allows a system administrator to configure the tables provided by the Linux kernel firewall (implemented as different Netfilter modules) and the chains and rules it stores. Different kernel modules and programs are currently used for different protocols; iptables applies to IPv4The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPLv2. libcurlmheg (7.21.6) curl for MHEG. The original download site for this software is : Curl and libcurl are licensed under a MIT/X derivate license. Please look at boringssl (af0e32cb84f0c9cc65b9233a3414d b342) toolbox (1.2.8) ssl for MHEG, Taken from android M. The original download site for this software is The 'toolbox' command in Android is a multi-function 84

85 : Licensed under BSD, please find in /android/nbase/external/boringssl/notice Malte Starostik, Mark Adler, Martin Jones, Marvin Decker, Matt Lilek, Michael Emmel, Mitz Pettel, mozilla.org, Netscape Communications Corporation, Nicholas Shanks, Nikolas Zimmermann, Nokia, Oliver Hunt, Opened Hand, Paul Johnston, Peter Kelly, Pioneer Research Center USA, Rich Moore, Rob Buis, Robin Dunn, Ronald Tschalär, Samuel Weinig, Simon Hausmann, Staikos Computing Services Inc., Stefan Schimanski, Symantec Corporation, The Dojo Foundation, The Karbon Developers, Thomas Boyer, Tim Copperfield, Tobias Anton, Torben Weis, Trolltech, University of Cambridge, Vaclav Slavik, Waldo Bastian, Xan Lopez, Zack Rusin libpng (1.6.22beta) libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG) reference library (originally called pnglib). It is a platform-independent library that contains C functions for handling PNG images. It supports almost all of PNG's features, is extensible. The original download site for this software is : This code is released under the libpng license. The terms and conditions vary from file to file, but are one of: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Hue SDK (1.8.1) TV ambihue app uses Philips SDK to find the hue bridge name. The original download site for this software is : a-multi-platform-and-android-sdk OR Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Opera Web Browser (SDK 4.8.0) THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE COMPUTER, INC. ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE COMPUTER, INC. OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This TV contains Opera Browser Software. Third-party licenses WebKit name License WebKit URL: (WebKit doesn't distribute an explicit license. This LICENSE is derived from license text in the source.) Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Alexander Kellett, Alexey Proskuryakov, Alex Mathews, Allan Sandfeld Jensen, Alp Toker, Anders Carlsson, Andrew Wellington, Antti Koivisto, Apple Inc., Arthur Langereis, Baron Schwartz, Bjoern Graf, Brent Fulgham, Cameron Zwarich, Charles Samuels, Christian Dywan, Collabora Ltd., Cyrus Patel, Daniel Molkentin, Dave Maclachlan, David Smith, Dawit Alemayehu, Dirk Mueller, Dirk Schulze, Don Gibson, Enrico Ros, Eric Seidel, Frederik Holljen, Frerich Raabe, Friedmann Kleint, George Staikos, Google Inc., Graham Dennis, Harri Porten, Henry Mason, Hiroyuki Ikezoe, Holger Hans Peter Freyther, IBM, James G. Speth, Jan Alonzo, Jean-Loup Gailly, John Reis, Jonas Witt, Jon Shier, Jonas Witt, Julien Chaffraix, Justin Haygood, Kevin Ollivier, Kevin Watters, Kimmo Kinnunen, Kouhei Sutou, Krzysztof Kowalczyk, Lars Knoll, Luca Bruno, Maks Orlovich, GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take 85

86 away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. certain designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same as in the ordinary license. The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is analogous to running a utility program or application program. However, in a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License treats it as such. This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for your libraries, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it. However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will lead to faster development of free libraries. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link a program with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only works together with the library. Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary General Public License rather than by this special one. GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you". Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently 86

87 linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely welldefined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the squareroot function must still compute square roots.) "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associate interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an 87

88 the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whateve changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machinereadable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work You must give prominent notice with each copy of 88

89 based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Library General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, 89

90 WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA USA 90

91 existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you". When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in nonfree programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based You may charge a fee for the physical act of 91

92 transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent noticesstating that you changed the files and the date of any change. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely welldefined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary 92

93 regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machinereadable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer syste rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified 93

94 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR 94

95 CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS -Other name License Chromium URL: The following files are distributed under the MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 tri-license: chromium-nss.h Copyright (c) 2013 The Chromium Authors. All rights reserved. chromium-blapi.h Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: chromium-blapit.h chromium-sha256.h chromium-prtypes.h Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. The following files contain portions distributed under the MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 tri-license: Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above registry_controlled_domains/registry_controlled_dom ain.cc copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer registry_controlled_domains/registry_controlled_dom ain.h in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the The following files are distributed under the MPL 2.0 license: Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from Fontconfig URL: this software without specific prior written permission. Copyright 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2006,2007 Keith Packard THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Copyright 2005 Patrick Lam "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT Copyright 2009 Roozbeh Pournader Copyright 2008,2009 Red Hat, Inc. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR Copyright 2008 Danilo Šegan A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, 95

96 documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that provided that you give the recipients all the rights that we gave you and make sure they can get the modifications of this software. the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting Legal Terms Throughout this License, "Font" means the TrueType fonts "AR PL Mingti2L Big5", "AR PL KaitiM Big5" (BIG-5 character set) and "AR PL SungtiL GB", "AR PL KaitiM GB" (GB character set) which are originally distributed by Arphic, and the derivatives of those fonts created through any modification including modifying glyph, reordering glyph, converting format, changing font name, or adding/deleting some characters in/from glyph table. documentation, and that the name of the author(s) not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. The authors make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It "PL" means "Public License". is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. "Copyright Holder" means whoever is named in the copyright or copyrights for the Font. "You" means the licensee, or person copying, redistributing or modifying the Font. THE AUTHOR(S) DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, "Freely Available" means that you have the freedom to copy or modify the Font as well as redistribute copies of the Font under the same conditions you received, not price. If you wish, you can charge for this service. INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of this Font in any medium, without restriction, provided that you retain this license file (ARPHICPL.TXT) unaltered in all copies. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER You may otherwise modify your copy of this Font in any way, including modifying glyph, reordering glyph, converting format, changing font name, or adding/deleting some characters in/from glyph table, and copy and distribute such modifications under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that the following conditions are met: TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Arphic fonts a) You must insert a prominent notice in each modified file stating how and when you changed that file. URL: nts/download b) You must make such modifications Freely Available as a whole to all third parties under the terms of this License, such as by offering access to copy the modifications from a designated place, or distributing the modifications on a medium customarily used for software interchange. ARPHIC PUBLIC LICENSE Copyright (C) 1999 Arphic Technology Co., Ltd. All rights reserved except as specified below. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is forbidden. c) If the modified fonts normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the Font under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the ARPHIC PUBLIC LICENSE specifically permits and encourages you to use this software, These requirements apply to the modified work 96

97 as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Font, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. Therefore, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Font with the Font on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE FONT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FONT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE FONT PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Font except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Font will automatically retroactively void your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will keep their licenses valid so long as such parties remain in full compliance. UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING, IN NO EVENT WILL ANY COPYRIGHTT HOLDERS, OR OTHER PARTIES WHO MAY COPY, MODIFY OR REDISTRIBUTE THE FONT AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDERS OR OTHER PARTIES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Font. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by copying, modifying, sublicensing or distributing the Font, you indicate your acceptance of this License and all its terms and conditions. Each time you redistribute the Font, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Font subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. Bitstream Vera fonts URL: _Fonts Bitstream Vera Fonts Copyright The fonts have a generous copyright, allowing derivative works (as long as "Bitstream" or "Vera" are not in the names), and full redistribution (so long as they are not sold by themselves). They can be be bundled, redistributed and sold with any software. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Font at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Font by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Font. The fonts are distributed under the following copyright: Copyright ========= Copyright (c) 2003 by Bitstream, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream, Inc. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the fonts accompanying this license ("Fonts") and associated If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. documentation files (the "Font Software"), to reproduce and distribute the Font Software, including without limitation the rights to use, BECAUSE THE FONT IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE FONT, copy, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of 97

98 the Font Foundation, and Bitstream Inc., shall not be used in advertising or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Font Software is furnished otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Font to do so, subject to the following conditions: Software without prior written authorization from the Gnome Foundation The above copyright and trademark notices and this permission notice or Bitstream Inc., respectively. For further information, contact: shall be included in all copies of one or more of the Font Software fonts at gnome dot org. The Font Software may be modified, altered, or added to, and in particular the designs of glyphs or characters in the Fonts may be Copyright FAQ ============= modified and additional glyphs or characters may be added to the 1. I don't understand the resale restriction... What gives? Fonts, only if the fonts are renamed to names not containing either Bitstream is giving away these fonts, but wishes to ensure its the words "Bitstream" or the word "Vera". competitors can't just drop the fonts as is into a font sale system This License becomes null and void to the extent applicable to Fonts and sell them as is. It seems fair that if Bitstream can't make money or Font Software that has been modified and is distributed under the "Bitstream Vera" names. from the Bitstream Vera fonts, their competitors should not be able to The Font Software may be sold as part of a larger software package but do so either. You can sell the fonts as part of any software package, no copy of one or more of the Font Software typefaces may be sold by itself. however. 2. I want to package these fonts separately for distribution and THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, sale as part of a larger software package or system. Can I do so? EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF Yes. A RPM or Debian package is a "larger software package" to begin MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT with, and you aren't selling them independently by themselves. OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL See 1. above. BITSTREAM OR THE GNOME FOUNDATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR 3. Are derivative works allowed? OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, Yes! OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR 4. Can I change or add to the font(s)? OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT Yes, but you must change the name(s) of the font(s). SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE. 5. Under what terms are derivative works allowed? You must change the name(s) of the fonts. This is to ensure the Except as contained in this notice, the names of Gnome, the Gnome 98

99 quality of the fonts, both to protect Bitstream and Gnome. We want to This depends on exact details of the software. Most open source ensure that if an application has opened a font specifically of these systems and software (e.g., Gnome, KDE, etc.) are now converting to names, it gets what it expects (though of course, using fontconfig, use fontconfig (see ) to handle font configuration, substitutions could still could have occurred during font selection and substitution; it has provisions for overriding font opening). You must include the Bitstream copyright. Additional names and subsituting alternatives. An example is provided by the copyrights can be added, as per copyright law. Happy Font Hacking! supplied local.conf file, which chooses the family Bitstream Vera for "sans", "serif" and "monospace". Other software (e.g., the XFree86 6. If I have improvements for Bitstream Vera, is it possible they might get core server) has other mechanisms for font substitution. adopted in future versions? Yes. The contract between the Gnome Foundation and Bitstream has Open Sans fonts provisions for working with Bitstream to ensure quality additions to URL: the Bitstream Vera font family. Please contact us if you have such additions. Note, that in general, we will want such additions for the License for Open Sans Font Family entire family, not just a single font, and that you'll have to keep Apache License both Gnome and Jim Lyles, Vera's designer, happy! To make sense to add January 2004 Version 2.0, glyphs to the font, they must be stylistically in keeping with Vera's design. Vera cannot become a "ransom note" font. Jim Lyles will be TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION providing a document describing the design elements used in Vera, as a 1. Definitions. guide and aid for people interested in contributing to Vera. "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, 7. I want to sell a software package that uses these fonts: Can I do so? and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. Sure. Bundle the fonts with your software and sell your software "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by with the fonts. That is the intent of the copyright. the copyright owner that is granting the License. "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all 8. If applications have built the names "Bitstream Vera" into them, other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common can I override this somehow to use fonts of my choosing? control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, 99

100 "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity. the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" "You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent exercising permissions granted by this License. to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to "Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, including but not limited to software source code, documentation and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the source, and configuration files. Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but "Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise transformation or translation of a Source form, including but designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution." not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, "Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity and conversions to other media types. "Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a subsequently incorporated within the Work. copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work 2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of (an example is provided in the Appendix below). this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, "Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form. of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, 3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of the Work and Derivative Works thereof. this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, "Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions (except as stated in this section) patent license 100

101 to make, have made, part of its use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed institute patent litigation against any entity (including a as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and as of the date such litigation is filed. do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside 4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You as modifying the License. meet the following conditions: You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and (a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or may provide additional or different license terms and conditions Derivative Works a copy of this License; and for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or (b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, stating that You changed the files; and (c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and the conditions stated in this License. attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, 5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work the Derivative Works; and by You to the Licensor shall be under the (d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as 101

102 terms and conditions of character arising as a this License, without any additional terms or conditions. result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all with Licensor regarding such Contributions. other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages. 6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, 9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file. and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this 7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability. PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License. APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work. 8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets "[]" unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a incidental, or consequential damages of any 102

103 file or class name and description of purpose be included on the SUZUKI and Project Vine based on M+ FONTS. Licese for VL Gothic same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier original glyphs is same as M+ FONTS PROJECT's license. identification within third-party archives. There is no limitation and the below description is not applied as for in order not to reuse as font (ex: font is embeded to documents). Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); Copyright (c) Wada Laboratory, the University of Tokyo. you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. Copyright (c) Electronic Font Open Laboratory (/efont/). You may obtain a copy of the License at Copyright (C) M+ FONTS PROJECT Copyright (C) Daisuke SUZUKI <daisuke@vinelinux.org>. Copyright (C) Project Vine <Vine@vinelinux.org>. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software All rights reserved. distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions See the License for the specific language governing permissions and are met: this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. limitations under the License. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation VL Gothic fonts and/or other materials provided with the distribution. URL: License for VLGothic Font Family the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products This font includes glyphs derived from M+ FONTS which is created by derived from this software without specific prior written permission. M+ FONTS PROJECT. License for M+ FONTS part is described in M+ FONTS PROJECT's license. See attached 'LICENSE_E.mplus'. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY WADA LABORATORY, THE UNIVERSITY OF TOKYO AND This font also includes glyphs derived from Sazanami Gothic font which CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT is created by Electronic Font Open Laboratory (/efont/). License for NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A Sazanami Gothic part is described in it's license. See attached PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LABORATORY OR 'README.sazanami' for original Sazanami Gothic font license. CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, This font also includes original glyphs which is created by Daisuke EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR 103

104 SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; embedded, redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives, however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the fonts or their derivatives. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF DEFINITIONS ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. "Font Software" refers to the set of files released by the Copyright Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may include source files, build scripts and documentation. Nanum fonts URL: "Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified as such after the copyright statement(s). Copyright (c) 2010, NAVER Corporation ( ). "Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s). with Reserved Font Name Nanum, Naver Nanum, NanumGothic, Naver NanumGothic, NanumMyeongjo, Naver NanumMyeongjo, NanumBrush, Naver NanumBrush, NanumPen, Naver NanumPen, Naver NanumGothicEco, NanumGothicEco, Naver NanumMyeongjoEco, NanumMyeongjoEco, Naver NanumGothicLight, NanumGothicLight, NanumBarunGothic, Naver NanumBarunGothic, "Modified Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to, deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting the Font Software to a new environment. "Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software. This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1. PERMISSION & CONDITIONS This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at: Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1. a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed, modify, This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at: redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies of the Font Software, subject to the following conditions: ) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version February 2007 in Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself ) Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software may be bundled, redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy PREAMBLE The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide development of collaborative font projects, to support the font creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and improved in partnership with others. contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be included either as stand-alone text files, humanreadable headers or in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields within text or The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modified and redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, binary files as long as those fields can be easily viewed by the user. 104

105 TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING 3) No Modified Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the corresponding OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE. Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the primary font name as Mini-XML URL: presented to the users. Mini-XML License 4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font The Mini-XML library and included programs are provided under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License version 2 (LGPL2) with the following exceptions: Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any Modified Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the If you link the application to a modified version of Mini-XML, then the changes to Mini-XML must be provided under the terms of the LGPL2 in sections 1, 2, and 4. Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written 5) The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part or in whole, GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA , USA distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the Font Software. [This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.] TERMINATION This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are Preamble not met. The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. DISCLAIMER THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for your libraries, too. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, 105

106 To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it. conditions might promote sharing better. However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will lead to faster development of free libraries. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link a program with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the libary" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only works together with the library. Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary General Public License rather than by this special one. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same as in the ordinary license. "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is analogous to running a utility program or application program. However, in a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License treats it as such. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer 106

107 warranty protection in exchange for a fee. equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely welldefined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering 107

108 charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. NO WARRANTY For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License). It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. one line to give the library's name and an idea of what it does. Copyright (C) year name of author b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice 108

109 That's all there is to it! COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright (c) , Daniel Stenberg, Boost All rights reserved. URL: Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose Boost Software License - Version August 17th, 2003 with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, this license (the "Software") to use, reproduce, display, distribute, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative works of the NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the Software is furnished to DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR do so, all subject to the following: OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. the above license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not must be included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or derivative in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by libcurl - lib/krb5.c a source language processor. URL: THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR / GSSAPI/krb5 support for FTP - loosely based on old krb4.c IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT Copyright (c) 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2013 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, Copyright (c) Daniel Stenberg All rights reserved. ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions libcurl URL: 109

110 are met: / This source code was modified by Martin Hedenfalk <mhe@stacken.kth.se> for use in Curl. His latest changes were done Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. It has since been patched and modified a lot by Daniel Stenberg <daniel@haxx.se> to make it better applied to curl conditions, and to make 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright it not use globals, pollute name space and more. This source code awaits a notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the rewrite to work around the paragraph 2 in the BSD licenses as explained documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. below. 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2013 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). without specific prior written permission. Copyright (C) , Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>, et al. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE All rights reserved. IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL are met: DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the SUCH DAMAGE. / documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. libcurl - lib/security.c URL: rity.c 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software 110

111 without specific prior written permission. AUTHOR NOR LUCENT MAKES ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE / ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE dynamic annotations FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL URL: DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS / Copyright (c) , Google Inc. All rights reserved. OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF met: SUCH DAMAGE. / Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright David M. Gay's floating point routines notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. URL: Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its / contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from The author of this software is David M. Gay. this software without specific prior written permission. Copyright (c) 1991, 2000, 2001 by Lucent Technologies. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, documentation for such software. SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE 111

112 INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF -- Author: Kostya Serebryany THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. / ============================== libevent URL: Portions of Libevent are based on works by others, also made available by Libevent is available for use under the following license, commonly known them under the three-clause BSD license above. The copyright notices are as the 3-clause (or "modified") BSD license: available in the corresponding source files; the license is as above. Here's ============================== a list: Copyright (c) Niels Provos <provos@citi.umich.edu> Copyright (c) 2000 Dug Song <dugsong@monkey.org> Copyright (c) Niels Provos and Nick Mathewson Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Copyright (c) 1998 Todd C. Miller <Todd.Miller@courtesan.com> modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions Copyright (c) 2003 Michael A. Davis <mike@datanerds.net> are met: Copyright (c) 2007 Sun Microsystems notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Copyright (c) 2006 Maxim Yegorushkin <maxim.yegorushkin@gmail.com> notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the Copyright 2002 Niels Provos <provos@citi.umich.edu> documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Netscape Portable Runtime (NSPR) derived from this software without specific prior written permission. URL: / BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at 112

113 Paul Hsieh's SuperFastHash URL: Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, Paul Hsieh OLD BSD license WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License Copyright (c) 2010, Paul Hsieh All rights reserved. for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, License. are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: The Original Code is the Netscape Portable Runtime (NSPR). Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Contributor(s): Neither my name, Paul Hsieh, nor the names of any other contributors to the Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of code use may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or software without specific prior written permission. the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. END LICENSE BLOCK / google-glog's symbolization library URL: 113

114 Copyright (c) 2006, Google Inc. version 2, unless otherwise indicated. All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Copyright (C) Julian Seward. All rights reserved. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS 2. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT documentation would be appreciated but is not required. OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, 3. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT not be misrepresented as being the original software. LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, 4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY products derived from this software without specific prior written THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT permission. (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED valgrind WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE URL: ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY Notice that the following BSD-style license applies to the Valgrind header DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL files used by Chromium (valgrind.h and memcheck.h). However, the rest of DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE Valgrind is licensed under the terms of the GNU General Public License, GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR 114

115 PROFITS; OR BUSINESS either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your Mozilla Personal Security Manager URL: decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete / BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with END LICENSE BLOCK / the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at Network Security Services (NSS) URL: Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, / BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version License. 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries. the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) 2000 Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the Contributor(s): License. Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries. 115

116 copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. Neither the name of TransGaming Inc., Google Inc., 3DLabs Inc. Ltd., nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Contributor(s): END LICENSE BLOCK / boringssl URL: open-vcdiff URL: LICENSE ISSUES ============== Almost Native Graphics Layer Engine The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of URL: Copyright (C) The ANGLE Project Authors. the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. All rights reserved. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. Redistributions of source code must retain the above 116

117 nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written OpenSSL License permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following / ============================================== ====================== Copyright (c) The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit ( )" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY are met: EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; the documentation and/or other materials provided with the acknowledgment: LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) distribution. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) software must display the following acknowledgment: ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. ( )" ============================================== ====================== 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young endorse or promote products derived from this software without (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim prior written permission. For written permission, please contact Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). openssl-core@openssl.org. / 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" Original SSLeay License 117

118 disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. / Copyright (C) Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software All rights reserved. must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library This library is free for commercial and noncommercial use as long as being used are not cryptographic related :-). 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE the code are not to be removed. FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions SUCH DAMAGE. are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] notice, this list of conditions and the following 118

119 / THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Brotli "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT URL: LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR Google Cache Invalidation API URL: /master/third_party/cacheinvalidation/readme.chro mium A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT Crashpad URL: LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, drawelements Quality Program DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY URL: html THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE dom-distiller-js OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. URL: Copyright 2014 The Chromium Authors. All rights reserved. Parts of the following directories are available under Apache v2.0 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are src/de met: Copyright (c) Christian Kohlschütter Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright third_party/gwt_exporter Copyright 2007 Timepedia.org notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. third_party/gwt Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above Copyright 2008 Google copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer java/org/chromium/distiller/dev in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the Copyright 2008 Google Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its Apache License contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from Version 2.0, January 2004 this software without specific prior written permission. 119

120 merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION "Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution." "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License. "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity. "Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and "You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and "Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and "Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License. "Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below). "Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or 120

121 You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License. IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. fips181 URL: END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Copyright (c) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Expat XML Parser Adel I. Mirzazhanov. All rights reserved URL: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions and Clark Cooper are met: Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers. 1.Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the 2.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to 3.The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to derived from this software without specific prior written permission. the following conditions: THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR 121

122 WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF flac LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING URL: NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2007 Josh Coalson SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. harfbuzz-ng Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without URL: modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions HarfBuzz is licensed under the so-called "Old MIT" license. Details follow. are met: For parts of HarfBuzz that are licensed under different licenses see individual - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright files names COPYING in subdirectories where applicable. notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Copyright 2010,2011,2012 Google, Inc. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright Copyright 2012 Mozilla Foundation Copyright 2011 Codethink Limited notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the Copyright 2008,2010 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies) documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Copyright 2009 Keith Stribley Copyright 2009 Martin Hosken and SIL International - Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its Copyright 2007 Chris Wilson Copyright 2006 Behdad Esfahbod contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from Copyright 2005 David Turner Copyright 2004,2007,2008,2009,2010 Red Hat, Inc. this software without specific prior written permission. Copyright David Turner and Werner Lemberg THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT For full copyright notices consult the individual files in the package. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO 122

123 Permission is hereby granted, without written agreement and without and distribute this software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these license or royalty fees, to use, copy, modify, and distribute this conditions: software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that the (1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this above copyright notice and the following two paragraphs appear in README file must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice all copies of this software. unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original files IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN documentation must state that "this software is based in part on the work of IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH the Independent JPEG Group". THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, full responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind. (3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS NO OBLIGATION TO not just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS. acknowledge us. iccjpeg Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name URL: in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, This software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group's with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or software". fitness for a particular purpose. This software is provided "AS IS", and you, We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy. commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. This software is copyright (C) , Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as specified below. icu URL: Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, 123

124 ICU License - ICU and later Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of Copyright (c) International Business Machines Corporation and the copyright holder. others All rights reserved. All trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a property of their respective owners. copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including Third-Party Software Licenses without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, This section contains third-party software notices and/or additional distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to terms for licensed third-party software components included within ICU whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above libraries. copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this 1. Unicode Data Files and Software permission notice appear in supporting documentation. COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS Distributed under the Terms of Use in OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to 124

125 whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) this copyright and permission notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) this copyright and permission notice appear in associated documentation, and The BSD License Copyright (C) , Google Inc. All rights reserved. (c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifi as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or cation, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Software that the data or software has been modified. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, th THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF is list of conditions and the following disclaimer. ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. other materials provided with the distribution. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, prior written permission. DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS I PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. S" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPL IED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLA Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder ECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDIN shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, G, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF L written authorization of the copyright holder. IABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR 2. Chinese/Japanese Word Break Dictionary Data (cjdict.txt) OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED O The Google Chrome software developed by Google is licensed under the BSD li F THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ses, as set forth below. 125

126 materials provided with the The word list in cjdict.txt are generated by combining three word lists l distribution. isted. Neither the name of the TaBE Project nor the names of its below with further processing for compound word breaking. The frequency i contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived s generated from this software without specific prior written permission. with an iterative training against Google web corpora. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Libtabe (Chinese) "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT - LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS - Its license terms and conditions are shown below. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE IPADIC (Japanese) REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, - INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES - Its license terms and conditions are shown below. (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) COPYING.libtabe ---BEGIN HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, / Copyrighy (c) 1999 TaBE Project. Copyright (c) 1999 Pai-Hsiang Hsiao. All rights reserved. STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Copyright (c) 1999 Computer Systems and Communication Lab, / / Institute of Information Science, Academia Sinica.. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright All rights reserved. notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions the documentation and/or other 126 are met:

127 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer COPYING.libtabe-----END Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in COPYING.ipadic-----BEGI N the documentation and/or other materials provided with the -- distribution.. Neither the name of the Computer Systems and Communication Lab Copyright 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Nara Institute of Science nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. and Technology. All Rights Reserved. Use, reproduction, and distribution of this software is permitted. Any copy of this software, whether in its original form or modified, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS must include both the above copyright notice and the following "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT paragraphs. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS Nara Institute of Science and Technology (NAIST), FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE the copyright holders, disclaims all warranties with regard to this REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, software, including all implied warranties of merchantability and INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES fitness, in no event shall NAIST be liable for (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR any special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, action of contract, negligence or other tortuous action, arising out STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) of or in connection with the use or performance of this software. ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. A large portion of the dictionary entries originate from ICOT Free Software. The following conditions for ICOT / Free Software applies to the current dictionary as well. Copyright 1996 Chih-Hao Beckman Institute, University of Illinois 127

128 Each User may also freely distribute the Program, whether in its organization that participated in or was otherwise related to the original form or modified, to any third party or parties, PROVIDED development of the program and their respective officials, directors, that the provisions of Section 3 ("NO WARRANTY") will ALWAYS appear officers and other employees shall be held liable for any and all on, or be attached to, the Program, which is distributed substantially damages, including, without limitation, general, special, incidental in the same form as set out herein and that such intended and consequential damages, arising out of or otherwise in connection distribution, if actually made, will neither violate or otherwise with the use or inability to use the program or any product, material contravene any of the laws and regulations of the countries having or result produced or otherwise obtained by using the program, jurisdiction over the User or the intended distribution itself. regardless of whether they have been advised of, or otherwise had knowledge of, the possibility of such damages at any time during the NO WARRANTY project or thereafter. Each user will be deemed to have agreed to the The program was produced on an experimental basis in the course of the foregoing by his or her commencement of use of the program. The term research and development conducted during the project and is provided "use" as used herein includes, but is not limited to, the use, to users as so produced on an experimental basis. Accordingly, the modification, copying and distribution of the program and the program is provided without any warranty whatsoever, whether express, production of secondary products from the program. implied, statutory or otherwise. The term "warranty" used herein In the case where the program, whether in its original form or includes, but is not limited to, any warranty of the quality, modified, was distributed or delivered to or received by a user from performance, merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose of any person, organization or entity other than ICOT, unless it makes or the program and the nonexistence of any infringement or violation of grants independently of ICOT any specific warranty to the user in any right of any third party. writing, such person, organization or entity, will also be exempted Each user of the program will agree and understand, and be deemed to from and not be held liable to the user for any such damages as noted have agreed and understood, that there is no warranty whatsoever for the program and, accordingly, the entire risk arising from or above as far as the program is concerned COPYING.ipadic-----END otherwise connected with the program is assumed by the user. 3. Lao Word Break Dictionary Data (laodict.txt) Therefore, neither ICOT, the copyright holder, or any other 128

129 Copyright (c) 2013 International Business Machines Corporation and others. All Rights Reserved Project: 4. Burmese Word Break Dictionary Data (burmesedict.txt) Dictionary: License: it/lao-dictionary-licen Copyright (c) 2014 International Business Machines Corporation and others. All Rights Reserved. (copied below) This list is part of a project hosted at: This file is derived from the above dictionary, with slight modifications. github.com/kanyawtech/myanmar-karen-word-lists Copyright (c) 2013, LeRoy Benjamin Sharon Copyright (C) 2013 Brian Eugene Wilson, Robert Martin Campbell. All rights reserved. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifi Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: cation, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright no Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, tice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of cond Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notic itions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materi e, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation an als provided with the distribution. d/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name Myanmar Karen Word Lists, nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS I S" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMP LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVIC DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED A ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DA ND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT MAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVIC (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF ES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED A THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT 129

130 (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF Khronos header files URL: THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright (c) The Khronos Group Inc Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a 5. Time Zone Database copy of this software and/or associated documentation files (the ICU uses the public domain data and code derived from Time Zone Database "Materials"), to deal in the Materials without restriction, including for its time zone support. The ownership of the TZ database is explained without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, in BCP 175: Procedure for Maintaining the Time Zone Database section 7. distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Materials, and to permit persons to whom the Materials are furnished to do so, subject to 1 - Database Ownership the following conditions: The TZ database itself is not an IETF Contribution or an IETF The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included document. Rather it is a pre-existing and regularly updated work in all copies or substantial portions of the Materials. that is in the public domain, and is intended to remain in the public THE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, domain. Therefore, BCPs 78 [RFC5378] and 79 [RFC3979] do not apply EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF to the TZ Database or contributions that individuals make to it. MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. Should any claims be made and substantiated against the TZ Database, IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY the organization that is providing the IANA Considerations defined in CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, this RFC, under the memorandum of understanding with the IETF, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE currently ICANN, may act in accordance with all competent court MATERIALS OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE MATERIALS. orders. No ownership claims will be made by ICANN or the IETF Trust on the database or the code. Any person making a contribution to the SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept. 18, 2008) database or code waives all rights to future claims in that contribution or in the TZ Database. Copyright (C) 1992 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. google-jstemplate URL: Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of 130

131 this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in following conditions are met: the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above so, subject to the following conditions: copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the this permission notice or a reference to Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR this software without specific prior written permission. IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT Graphics, Inc. (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE LevelDB: A Fast Persistent Key-Value Store OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. URL: Copyright (c) 2011 The LevelDB Authors. All rights reserved. The library to input, validate, and display addresses. URL: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the libjingle 131

132 URL: not just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us. libjpeg URL: Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group's The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, software". with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of fitness for a particular purpose. This software is provided "AS IS", and you, commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy. assumed by the product vendor. This software is copyright (C) , Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as specified below. sole proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA. by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation; principally, Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this that you must include source code if you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these full details.) conditions: However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part (1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this of any program generated from the IJG code, this does not limit you more than README file must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice the foregoing paragraphs do. unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original files The Unix configuration script "configure" was produced with GNU Autoconf. must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. It is copyright by the Free Software Foundation but is freely distributable. (2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying The same holds for its supporting scripts (config.guess, config.sub, documentation must state that "this software is based in part on the work of ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support script, install-sh, is copyright the Independent JPEG Group". (3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts by M.I.T. but is also freely distributable. full responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind. patents owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence arithmetic coding cannot These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, legally be used without obtaining one or more licenses. For this reason, 132

133 support for arithmetic coding has been removed from the free JPEG software. modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: (Since arithmetic coding provides only a marginal gain over the unpatented - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, Huffman mode, it is unlikely that very many implementations will support it.) this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. So far as we are aware, there are no patent restrictions on the remaining - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files. and/or other materials provided with the distribution. To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent, GIF reading support has - Neither the name of the libjpeg-turbo Project nor the names of its been removed altogether, and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this "uncompressed GIFs". This technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the software without specific prior written permission. resulting GIF files are larger than usual, but are readable by all standard THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS", GIF decoders. We are required to state that AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE "The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE CompuServe Incorporated." LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS Public License. INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN libjpeg-turbo CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE URL: POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. libjpeg-turbo is licensed under a non-restrictive, BSDstyle license International Phone Number Library (see README.) The TurboJPEG/OSS wrapper (both C and Java versions) and URL: associated test programs bear a similar license, which is reproduced below: Copyright (C) 2011 Google Inc. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the 133

134 "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. Simon-Pierre Cadieux Eric S. Raymond You may obtain a copy of the License at Cosmin Truta Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaimer: Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes See the License for the specific language governing permissions and or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire limitations under the License. risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with libpng URL: the user. This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is Copyright (c) Glenn Randers-Pehrson, are derived from included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail. libpng-0.96, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: of Contributing Authors: If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following Tom Lane this sentence. Glenn Randers-Pehrson Willem van Schaik This code is released under the libpng license. libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) Andreas Dilger, are derived from libpng-0.88, libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through , November 12, 2015, are and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as Copyright (c) , 2004, Glenn Randers-Pehrson, are libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of derived from libpng-1.0.6, and are distributed according to the same Contributing Authors: disclaimer and license as libpng with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: John Bowler 134

135 Kevin Bracey 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not Sam Bushell be misrepresented as being the original source. Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any Tom Tanner source or altered source distribution. libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without Copyright (c) Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Authors" supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this is defined as the following set of individuals: source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be Andreas Dilger Dave Martindale END OF COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE. Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for convenient use in "about" Tim Wegner boxes and the like: The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors printf("%s", png_get_copyright(null)); and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. files "pngbar.png.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png.jpg" (98x31). assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. OSI has not addressed Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. the additional disclaimers inserted at version Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this Glenn Randers-Pehrson glennrp at users.sourceforge.net source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject November 12, 2015 to the following restrictions: libsrtp 1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented. URL: / 135

136 LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, Copyright (c) Cisco Systems, Inc. STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) All rights reserved. ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions / are met: libusbx Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright URL: notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. libvpx URL: Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above Copyright (c) 2010, The WebM Project authors. All rights reserved. copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without with the distribution. modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Neither the name of the Cisco Systems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright from this software without specific prior written permission. notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, Neither the name of Google, nor the WebM Project, nor the names INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR derived from this software without specific prior written SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) permission. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF 136

137 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS infringed by these implementations of WebM. This grant does not include claims "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of these LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR or agree to the institution of patent litigation or any other patent A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT enforcement activity against any entity (including a cross-claim or HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any of these implementations of WebM SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT or any code incorporated within any of these implementations of WebM LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, constitute direct or contributory patent infringement, or inducement of DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY patent infringement, then any patent rights granted to you under this License THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT for these implementations of WebM shall terminate as of the date such (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE litigation is filed. OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. libxml URL: Except where otherwise noted in the source code (e.g. the files hash.c, WebP image encoder/decoder URL: with different Copyright notices) all the files are: Additional IP Rights Grant (Patents) Copyright (C) Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. "These implementations" means the copyrightable works that implement the WebM Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy codecs distributed by Google as part of the WebM Project. of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights Google hereby grants to you a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is fur- make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, transfer, and otherwise nished to do so, subject to the following conditions: run, modify and propagate the contents of these implementations of WebM, where The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in such license applies only to those patent claims, both currently owned by all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Google and acquired in the future, licensable by Google that are necessarily THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT 137

138 WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CON- IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT- NECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE Except as contained in this notice, the name of Daniel Veillard shall not AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal- LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, ings in this Software without prior written authorization from him. OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE libxslt URL: Licence for libexslt Licence for libxslt except libexslt Copyright (C) Thomas Broyer, Charlie Bozeman and Daniel Veillard All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is fur- copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is fur- nished to do so, subject to the following conditions: nished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT- IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT- NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER DANIEL VEILLARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CON- IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, 138

139 NECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT Except as contained in this notice, the name of the authors shall not HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal- SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT ings in this Software without prior written authorization from him. LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT libyuv URL: (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE Copyright 2011 The LibYuv Project Authors. All rights reserved. OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without linux-syscall-support URL: modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: // Copyright 2015 The Chromium Authors. All rights reserved. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright // // Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. // modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright // met: // notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in // Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright the documentation and/or other materials provided with the // notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. distribution. // Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above Neither the name of Google nor the names of its contributors may // copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software // in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the without specific prior written permission. // distribution. // Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS // contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT // this software without specific prior written 139

140 permission. // THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND // THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED // "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE // LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES // A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; // OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON // SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT // LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS // DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. // THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT // (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE LZMA SDK URL: // OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. LZMA SDK is placed in the public domain. mesa LZ4 - Extremely fast compression URL: URL: The default Mesa license is as follows: LZ4 Library Copyright (c) , Yann Collet Copyright (C) Brian Paul All Rights Reserved. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, list of conditions and the following disclaimer. and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included 140

141 in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS Neither the name of the modp.com nor the names of its OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL this software without specific prior written permission. BRIAN PAUL BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR Some parts of Mesa are copyrighted under the GNU LGPL. See the A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT Mesa/docs/COPYRIGHT file for details. OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, modp base64 decoder SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT URL: LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, MODP_B64 - High performance base64 encoder/decoder DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY Version Mar-2006 THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE Copyright (c) 2005, 2006 Nick Galbreath -- nickg [at] modp [dot] com OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Mojo URL: modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are // Copyright 2014 The Chromium Authors. All rights reserved. met: // Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright // Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. // modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are // met: Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright // notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the // Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright 141

142 // notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Before using, initialize the state by using init_genrand(seed) // Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above or init_by_array(init_key, key_length). // copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Copyright (C) , Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura, // in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the All rights reserved. // distribution. // Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without // contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions // this software without specific prior written permission. are met: // 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright // THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. // "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT // LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright // A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the // OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. // SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT // LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, 3. The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote // DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. // THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT // (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS // OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT mt19937ar LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR URL: A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, A C-program for MT19937, with initialization improved 2002/1/26. EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, Coded by Takuji Nishimura and Makoto Matsumoto. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR 142

143 PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete Netscape Plugin Application Programming Interface (NPAPI) the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under URL: the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 OpenMAX DL URL: OX000-BU r1p0-00bet0/OX000-BU r1p0-00bet0.tgz The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at Use of this source code is governed by a BSD-style license that can be Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, found in the LICENSE file in the root of the source tree. All WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License contributing project authors may be found in the AUTHORS file in the for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the root of the source tree. The Original Code is mozilla.org code. The files were originally licensed by ARM Limited. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is The following files: Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) 1998 dl/api/omxtypes.h dl/sp/api/omxsp.h the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. are licensed by Khronos: Contributor(s): Copyright The Khronos Group Inc. All Rights Reserved. Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or These materials are protected by copyright laws and contain material the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), proprietary to the Khronos Group, Inc. You may use these materials in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead for implementing Khronos specifications, without altering or removing 143

144 any trademark, copyright or other notice from the specification. above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Khronos Group makes no, and expressly disclaims any, representations - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright or warranties, express or implied, regarding these materials, including, notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. for a particular purpose or non-infringement of any intellectual property. Khronos Group makes no, and expressly disclaims any, warranties, express - Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF Trust, nor the or implied, regarding the correctness, accuracy, completeness, timeliness, names of specific contributors, may be used to endorse or promote and reliability of these materials. products derived from this software without specific prior written Under no circumstances will the Khronos Group, or any of its Promoters, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Contributors or Members or their respective partners, officers, directors, ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT employees, agents or representatives be liable for any damages, whether LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR direct, indirect, special or consequential damages for lost revenues, A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER lost profits, or otherwise, arising from or in connection with these OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, Khronos and OpenMAX are trademarks of the Khronos Group Inc. EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR opus PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF URL: Copyright Xiph.Org, Skype Limited, Octasic, LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING Jean-Marc Valin, Timothy B. Terriberry, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS CSIRO, Gregory Maxwell, Mark Borgerding, SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Erik de Castro Lopo Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Opus is subject to the royalty-free patent licenses which are modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions specified at: are met: Microsoft Corporation: - Redistributions of source code must retain the 144

145 The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Broadcom Corporation: THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, OTS (OpenType Sanitizer) URL: EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PLY (Python Lex-Yacc) THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION URL: PLY (Python Lex-Yacc) Version 3.4 OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Protocol Buffers URL: re2 - an efficient, principled regular expression library Code generated by the Protocol Buffer compiler is owned by the owner URL: of the input file used when generating it. This code is not sfntly standalone and requires a support library to be linked with it. This URL: support library is itself covered by the above license. Skia URL: Quick Color Management System URL: qcms Some files under resources are under the following license: Copyright (C) 2009 Mozilla Corporation Copyright (C) Marti Maria Unlimited Commercial Use Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining We try to make it clear that you may use all clipart from Openclipart even for unlimited commercial use. We believe that giving away our images is a great way to share with the world our talents and that will come back around in a better form. a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation May I Use Openclipart for? the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, We put together a small chart of as many possibilities and questions we have heard from people asking how they may use Openclipart. If you have an additional question, please love@openclipart.org. and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: All Clipart are Released into the Public Domain. 145

146 Each artist at Openclipart releases all rights to the images they share at Openclipart. The reason is so that there is no friction in using and sharing images authors make available at this website so that each artist might also receive the same benefit in using other artists clipart totally for any possible reason. documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. o Neither the name of the Linux USB Project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from SMHasher this software without specific prior written permission. URL: Snappy: A fast compressor/decompressor THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. URL: sqlite URL: The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of a legal notice, here is a blessing: May you do good and not evil. May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. May you share freely, never taking more than you give. tcmalloc URL: usrsctp URL: The USB ID Repository URL: (Copied from the COPYRIGHT file of Copyright (c) 2012, Linux USB Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Copyright (c) 2001, 2002 Cisco Systems, Inc. Copyright (c) Randall R. Stewart Copyright (c) Michael Tuexen o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, All rights reserved. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the are met: 146

147 persons to whom the notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the The above copyright notice and this permission notice (including the next documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. paragraph) shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT --- LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY The above is the version of the MIT "Expat" License used by X.org: OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. G wayland URL: wayland-protocols Copyright Kristian Høgsberg URL: Copyright Intel Corporation Copyright 2011 Benjamin Franzke Copyright Kristian Høgsberg Copyright 2012 Collabora, Ltd. Copyright Intel Corporation Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), Copyright 2013 Rafael Antognolli Copyright 2013 Jasper St. Pierre Copyright 2014 Jonas Ådahl Copyright 2014 Jason Ekstrand Copyright Collabora, Ltd. to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation Copyright 2015 Red Hat Inc. the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit 147

148 person obtaining a Copyright (c) 2011, The WebRTC project authors. All rights reserved. copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the met: Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. The above copyright notice and this permission notice (including the next paragraph) shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR the documentation and/or other materials provided with the IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, distribution. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL Neither the name of Google nor the names of its contributors may THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING without specific prior written permission. FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT --- LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR The above is the version of the MIT "Expat" License used by X.org: A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, G SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT Web Animations JS LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, URL: DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT WebRTC URL: (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE 148

149 OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ; NASM/YASM syntax combined with a large number of macros to provide easy ; abstraction between different calling conventions (x86_32, win64, linux64). x86inc ; It also has various other useful features to simplify writing the kind of URL: x86/x86inc.asm ; DSP functions that are most often used in x264. ; ; Unlike the rest of x264, this file is available under an ISC license, as it ; x86inc.asm ; has significant usefulness outside of x264 and we want it to be available ; ; to the largest audience possible. Of course, if you modify it for your own ; Copyright (C) x264 project ; purposes to add a new feature, we strongly encourage contributing a patch ; ; Authors: Loren Merritt <lorenm@u.washington.edu> ; as this feature might be useful for others as well. Send patches or ideas ; Anton Mitrofanov <BugMaster@narod.ru> ; to x264-devel@videolan.org. ; Jason Garrett-Glaser <darkshikari@gmail.com> zlib ; URL: ; Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any ; purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above / zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library ; copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. version 1.2.4, March 14th, 2010 ; Copyright (C) Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler ; THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES ; WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied ; MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages ; ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES arising from the use of this software. ; WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, ; ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it ; OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. freely, subject to the following restrictions: ; 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software ; This is a header file for the x264asm assembly language, which uses 149

150 in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT appreciated but is not required. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT misrepresented as being the original software. OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT Jean-loup Gailly LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, Mark Adler DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY / THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT url_parse (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE URL: ozilla/netwerk/base/src/nsurlparsers.cpp OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright 2007, Google Inc. All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without The file url_parse.cc is based on nsurlparsers.cc from Mozilla. This file is modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are licensed separately as follows: met: The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its The Original Code is mozilla.org code. contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from The Initial Developer of the Original Code is this software without specific prior written permission. Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) 1998 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. 150

151 based on layout tests from webkit.org which are copyrighted by Contributor(s): Apple Computer, Inc. and released under a 3-clause BSD license. Darin Fisher (original author) Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of - Strongtalk assembler, the basis of the files assembler-arm-inl.h, either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or assembler-arm.cc, assembler-arm.h, assembleria32-inl.h, the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), assembler-ia32.cc, assembler-ia32.h, assemblerx64-inl.h, in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead assembler-x64.cc, assembler-x64.h, assemblermips-inl.h, of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only assembler-mips.cc, assembler-mips.h, assembler.cc and assembler.h. under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to This code is copyrighted by Sun Microsystems Inc. and released use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your under a 3-clause BSD license. decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice - Valgrind client API header, located at third_party/valgrind/valgrind.h and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete This is release under the BSD license. the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under These libraries have their own licenses; we recommend you read them, the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. as their terms may differ from the terms below. V8 JavaScript Engine Further license information can be found in LICENSE files located in URL: sub-directories. This license applies to all parts of V8 that are not externally Copyright 2014, the V8 project authors. All rights reserved. maintained libraries. The externally maintained libraries used by V8 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without are: modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are - PCRE test suite, located in met: test/mjsunit/third_party/regexp-pcre/regexppcre.js. This is based on the test suite from PCRE-7.3, which is copyrighted by the University Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright of Cambridge and Google, Inc. The copyright notice and license notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. are embedded in regexp-pcre.js. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following - Layout tests, located in test/mjsunit/third_party/object-keys. These are 151

152 disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided Copyright (c) Sun Microsystems Inc. with the distribution. All Rights Reserved. Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are from this software without specific prior written permission. met: THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR - Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above copyright A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, - Neither the name of Sun Microsystems or the names of contributors may DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT specific prior written permission. (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR fdlibm URL: PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR Copyright (C) by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved. CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, Developed at SunSoft, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF software is freely granted, provided that this notice is preserved. LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING Strongtalk NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS URL: 152

153 SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED Extra bundled binaries name libcap URL: WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. License IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, Unless otherwise explicitly stated, the following text describes the BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS licensed conditions under which the contents of this libcap release OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND may be used and distributed: ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of libcap, with USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: libnsspem notice, and this entire permission notice in its entirety, URL: including the disclaimer of warranties. / BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK copyright notices, this list of conditions, and the following Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version with the distribution. 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with products derived from this software without their specific prior the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at written permission. ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed under the terms of the Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, GNU General Public License (v2.0 - see below), in which case the WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF the above restrictions. for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the (This clause is necessary due to a potential conflict License. between the GNU GPL and the restrictions contained in a BSD-style The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries. 153

154 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. Contributor(s): Rob Crittenden (rcritten@redhat.com) Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or MIT LICENSE the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete the following conditions: the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. END LICENSE BLOCK / THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, Return to Documentation index. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF Opera TV AS Confidential information of Opera TV. MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY BSD LICENSE CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. 154

155 library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail. the user. COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are this sentence. distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, This code is released under the libpng license. with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.4.1, February 25, 2010, are Tom Lane Copyright (c) 2004, Glenn RandersPehrson, and are Glenn Randers-Pehrson Willem van Schaik distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, Cosmin Truta with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through October 3, 2002, are Copyright (c) Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are John Bowler Kevin Bracey distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng Sam Bushell with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner Simon-Pierre Cadieux Eric S. Raymond libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Gilles Vollant Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. and with the following additions to the disclaimer: For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Authors" There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the is defined as the following set of individuals: 155

156 Andreas Dilger Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the Dave Martindale files "pngbar.png.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png.jpg" (98x31). Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegner Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, Glenn Randers-Pehrson glennrp at users.sourceforge.net including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of February 25, 2010 fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, This software is based in part on the work of the FreeType Team. or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. The FreeType Project LICENSE Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject 2006-Jan-27 to the following restrictions: Copyright , be misrepresented as being the original source by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg source or altered source distribution. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without Introduction ============ fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for convenient use in "about" FreeType Project. boxes and the like: This license applies to all files found in such packages, and printf("%s",png_get_copyright(null)); 156

157 which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license """ Portions of this software are copyright ɠ<year> The FreeType affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, Project ( All rights reserved. documentation and makefiles, at the very least. """ This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion actually use. and use of free software in commercial and freeware products Legal Terms alike. As a consequence, its main points are that: =========== o We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution) and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and full form, without having to pay us. (`royaltyfree' usage) Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release. o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source somewhere in your documentation that you have used the code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. FreeType code. (`credits') This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this engine'. software, with or without modifications, in commercial products. This license applies to all files distributed in the original We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project. documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus this license, you must contact us to verify this. encourage you to use the following text: 157

158 The FreeType Project is copyright (C) by David Turner, disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also specified below. encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory. THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO to us. USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use This license grants a worldwide, royaltyfree, perpetual and the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile, purposes without specific prior written permission. display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. herein, subject to the following conditions: As you have not signed this license, you are not required to o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to material, only this license, or another one contracted with the the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType original files must be preserved in all copies of source Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms files. of this license. o Redistribution in binary form must provide a

159 There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor, and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor. freetype@nongnu.org 1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or Modifications or the Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as combination of the Original Code and Modifications, in each case future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. including portions thereof. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the documentation. o 1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic freetype-devel@nongnu.org transfer of data. Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, 1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any form other than Source specific licenses, porting, etc. Code. Our home page can be found at 1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit --- end of FTL.TXT --- A "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License. MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE Version "License" means this document "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein. Covered Code available to a third party "Contributor" means each entity that creates or contributes to 1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion from the the creation of Modifications. substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous 1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of the Original Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a 159

160 Modification is: License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1. A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file For legal entities, "You" includes any entity which controls, is containing Original Code or previous Modifications. controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of this definition, "control" means (a) the power, direct or indirect, B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by previous Modifications. contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent "Original Code" means Source Code of computer software code (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such which is described in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A as entity. Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this 2.1. The Initial Developer Grant. License is not already Covered Code governed by this License. The Initial Developer hereby grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s), now owned or claims: hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor. trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original "Source Code" means the preferred form of the Covered Code for Code (or portions thereof) with or without Modifications, and/or making modifications to it, including all modules it contains, plus as part of a Larger Work; and any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation of an Executable, or source code (b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use, practice, well known, available Covered Code of the Contributor's choice. The sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form, provided the Original Code (or portions thereof). appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available (c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b) are for no charge. effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity Original Code under the terms of this License. exercising rights under, and complying with all of the terms of, this 160

161 (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is effective on the date Contributor first makes Commercial Use of granted: 1) for code that You delete from the Original Code; 2) the Covered Code. separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is by: i) the modification of the Original Code or ii) the granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has deleted from the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices. Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version; 3) for infringements caused by: i) third party modifications of 2.2. Contributor Grant. Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license by that Contributor with other software (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify, that Contributor. display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications 3.1. Application of License. created by such Contributor (or portions thereof) either on an The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code governed by the terms of this License, including without limitation and/or as part of a Larger Work; and Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be (b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions copy of this License with every copy of the Source Code You of such combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source Code made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2) the combination of License or the recipients' rights hereunder. However, You may include Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor an additional document offering the additional rights described in Version (or portions of such combination). Section Availability of Source Code. (c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be 161

162 made available in Source Code form under the terms of this License distribution titled "LEGAL" which describes the claim and the either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted party making the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after Executable version available; and if made available via Electronic the Modification is made available as described in Section 3.2, Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12) Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies months after the date it initially became available, or at least six Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps (6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups) has been made available to such recipients. You are responsible for reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered ensuring that the Source Code version remains available even if the Code that new knowledge has been obtained. Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party. (b) Contributor APIs. If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming 3.3. Description of Modifications. You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which file documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that also include this information in the LEGAL file. the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original (c) Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the Representations. Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that Contributor's Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or origin or ownership of the Covered Code. Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by 3.4. Intellectual Property Matters this License. (a) Third Party Claims. If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's 3.5. Required Notices. You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source intellectual property rights is required to exercise the rights Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a particular Source granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a Contributor must include a text file with the Source Code location (such as a relevant directory) where a 162

163 user would be likely Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice, which may to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s) contain terms different from this License, provided that You are in You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License in any documentation Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's for the Source Code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights in the Source Code version from the rights set forth in this rights relating to Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to License. If You distribute the Executable version under a different charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial terms You offer. Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the 3.7. Larger Works. Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code support, indemnity or liability terms You offer. not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger 3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions. Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code. requirements of Section have been met for that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License, License with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously included the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) in any notice in an Executable version, related documentation or describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description collateral in which You describe recipients' rights relating to the must be included in the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must Covered Code. You may distribute the Executable version of Covered be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to the 163

164 extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be Public License and Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of the Initial sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in understand it. Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has this License.) attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related Covered Code. COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, 6.1. New Versions. WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape") may publish revised WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF and/or new versions of the License from time to time. Each version DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. will be given a distinguishing version number. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE 6.2. Effect of New Versions. IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE License, You may always continue to use it under the terms of that COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape. No one ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER. other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate 6.3. Derivative Works. automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All only do in order to apply it to code which is not already Covered Code sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their the phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL", "Netscape", nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in your shall survive. license (except to note that your license differs from this License) 8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against Initial Developer contains terms which differ from the Mozilla 164

165 or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as You file such action is referred to as "Participant") alleging that: by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of patent (a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted by such granted by such Participant under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively, license. unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i) 8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to prior to termination shall survive termination. the Contributor Version against such Participant. If within 60 days UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE, is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY the 60 day notice period specified above. CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, (b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER Contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b) INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the date You first made, used, LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by that RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW Participant. PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE 8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO alleging that such Participant's Contributor THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT 165

166 APPLY TO YOU. shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this License. The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial computer As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly, terms are used in 48 C.F.R (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to C.F.R and 48 C.F.R through (June 1995), work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or rights set forth herein. shall be deemed to constitute any admission of liability. This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be "Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed" means that the Initial unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall be governed by Your choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses, if any, specified California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A. any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflictof-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License. or an entity chartered or registered to do business in the United ``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys' fees and basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on License for the specific language governing rights and limitations Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded. under the License. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract The Original Code is 166

167 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Perbarui Prgkt Lunak > Pengumuman dan 3 - Jika ada pengumuman, Anda bisa membacanya atau memilih salah satu pengumuman yang tersedia. 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu.. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is. Portions created by are Copyright (C). All Rights Reserved. Contributor(s):. Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the license (the "[ ] License"), in which case the provisions of [ ] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the [ ] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [ ] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the [ ] License." [NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.] 23.6 Pengumuman Anda bisa menerima pengumuman tentang perangkat lunak baru TV yang tersedia untuk diunduh atau masalah terkait perangkat lunak lainnya. Untuk membaca pengumuman ini 167

168 baterai secara terpisah karena membuang baterai dengan benar akan membantu mencegah kemungkinan dampak negatif terhadap kesehatan lingkungan dan manusia. 24 Spesifikasi 24.1 Lingkungan 24.2 Daya Label Daya Eropa Spesifikasi produk bisa berubah tanpa pemberitahuan. Untuk detail spesifikasi produk ini selengkapnya, lihat Label Daya Eropa berisi informasi tentang kelas efisiensi daya produk ini. Semakin hijau kelas efisiensi daya produk ini, semakin rendah konsumsi dayanya. Pada label, Anda dapat menemukan kelas efisiensi daya, konsumsi daya rata-rata produk ini saat digunakan dan rata-rata konsumsi daya selama 1 tahun. Anda juga dapat menemukan nilai konsumsi daya produk ini di situs web Philips negara Anda di Daya Daya listrik: AC V +/-10% Suhu Sekitar: 5 C hingga 35 C Fitur hemat daya: Mode ekonomis, Gambar diam (untuk radio), Timer nonaktifkan otomatis, Menu pengaturan ekonomis. Untuk informasi konsumsi daya, lihat bab Mikrofis Produk. Akhir Penggunaan Peringkat daya yang tertera pada typeplate produk merupakan konsumsi daya produk ini selama penggunaan rumah tangga biasa (IEC Ed.2). Peringkat daya maksimum, yang tertera di antara tanda kurung, digunakan untuk keselamatan listrik (IEC Ed. 7.2). Pembuangan produk dan baterai lama Produk Anda dirancang dan diproduksi dengan bahan dan komponen berkualitas tinggi, yang dapat didaur ulang dan digunakan kembali Sistem Operasi OS Android: Bila Anda melihat simbol tempat sampah yang disilang pada produk, artinya produk tersebut dicakup dalam European Directive 2012/19/EU. Android Nougat Penerimaan Input antena: Koaksial 75 ohm (IEC75) Band tuner: Hyperband, S-Channel, UHF, VHF DVB: DVB-T2; DVB-C (kabel) QAM Pemutaran video analog : SECAM, PAL Pemutaran video digital : MPEG2 SD/HD (ISO/IEC ), MPEG4 SD/HD (ISO/IEC ), HEVC Pemutaran audio digital (ISO/IEC ) Input antena satelit : 75 ohm tipe-f Rentang frekuensi input : 950 hingga 2150MHz Rentang level input : 25 hingga 65 dbm DVB-S/S2 QPSK, laju simbol 2 hingga 45M simbol, SCPC dan MCPC LNB: DiSEqC 1.0, 1 hingga 4 LNB didukung, Pemilihan polaritas 14/18V, Pemilihan pita 22kHz, Mode tune burst, arus LNB maks 300mA Cobalah cari tahu tentang sistem pengumpulan terpisah di tempat Anda untuk produk listrik dan elektronik. Patuhi peraturan setempat dan jangan membuang produk lama Anda bersamaan dengan limbah rumah tangga biasa. Pembuangan produk lama dengan benar membantu mencegah kemungkinan dampak negatif terhadap kesehatan lingkungan dan manusia. Produk Anda menggunakan baterai yang dicakup dalam European Directive 2006/66/EC, yang tidak boleh dibuang bersamaan dengan limbah rumah tangga biasa. Hanya untuk DVB-T2, DVB-S2 Cari tahu peraturan setempat tentang pengumpulan 168

169 Tipe Layar Suara Ukuran layar diagonal 164 cm / 65 inci Daya output (RMS): 50W Dolby Audio DTS Premium Sound Resolusi layar 3840 x Multimedia 24.6 Resolusi Input Layar Sambungan USB USB 3.0 Ethernet LAN RJ-45 Wi-Fi a/b/g/n/ac (bawaan) BT2.1 dengan EDR & BT4.0 dengan BLE ( TV Anda tidak mendukung subwoofer Bluetooth dan speaker Bluetooth) Format video Resolusi Kecepatan refresh 480i - 60 Hz 480p - 60 Hz 576i - 50 Hz 576p - 50 Hz 720p - 50 Hz, 60 Hz 1080i - 50 Hz, 60 Hz 1080p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz 2160p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz Sistem file USB yang didukung FAT 16, FAT 32, NTFS Format pemutaran Codec Video : AVI, MKV, H264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, WMV9/VC1, HEVC Codec Audio : AAC, MP3, WAV, WMA (v2 up to v9.2), WMA-PRO (v9 dan v10) Terjemahan : Format : SRT, SUB, TXT, SMI Pengkodean karakter : UTF-8, Eropa Tengah dan Eropa Timur (Windows-1250), Sirilik (Windows-1251), Yunani (Windows-1253), Turki (Windows-1254), Eropa Barat (Windows-1252) Codec Gambar: JPEG Batasan: Kecepatan bit total maksimum untuk file media adalah 30 Mbps. Kecepatan bit total maksimum untuk file media adalah 20 Mbps. MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) didukung hingga Profil L5.1. H.265 (HEVC) didukung hingga Profil Utama / Utama 10 hingga Level 5.1 VC-1 didukung hingga Profil L3. Format komputer Resolusi (di antaranya) 640 x 480p - 60 Hz 800 x 600p - 60 Hz 1024 x 768p - 60 Hz 1280 x 768p - 60 Hz 1360 x 765p - 60 Hz 1360 x 768p - 60 Hz 1280 x 1024p - 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p - 60 Hz 3840 x 2160p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz 24.7 Konektivitas Bagian Samping TV Slot Antarmuka umum: CI+/CAM USB 1 - USB 2.0 USB 2 - USB 3.0 Headphone - Jack mini stereo 3,5mm HDMI 1 in - ARC - MHL - Ultra HD - HDR HDMI 2 in - ARC - Ultra HD - HDR Perangkat lunak server media yang didukung (DMS) Anda hanya dapat menggunakan perangkat lunak server media tersertifikasi DLNA V1.5 (kelas DMS). Anda dapat menggunakan Aplikasi Remote Philips (ios dan Android) pada perangkat seluler. Kinerja mungkin berbeda, bergantung pada kemampuan perangkat seluler dan perangkat lunak yang digunakan. Bagian Bawah TV Audio out - Optik Toslink LAN jaringan - RJ45 YPbPr, L/R HDMI 4 in - ARC HDMI 3 in - ARC Antena (75 ohm) YPbPr, L/R Tuner satelit 169

170 mendiagnosis dan mendapatkan lebih banyak informasi tentang TV Anda. 25 bantuan dan Dukungan Cara - Anda dapat melihat petunjuk tentang cara menginstal saluran, mengurutkan saluran, memperbarui perangkat lunak TV, menyambungkan perangkat eksternal, dan menggunakan fungsi Smart di TV Anda Mendaftarkan TV Anda Periksa TV - Anda dapat memeriksa apakah gambar, suara, Ambilight berfungsi dengan baik. Periksa Jaringan - Memeriksa sambungan jaringan. Perbarui prgkt lunak - Memeriksa pembaruan perangkat lunak yang tersedia. Buku petunjuk - Baca buku petunjuk untuk informasi TV. Penyelesaian masalah - Temukan solusi untuk pertanyaan yang sering diajukan. Pengaturan pabrik - Mengatur ulang semua pengaturan ke pengaturan pabrik. Instal Ulang TV - Menginstal ulang dan mengulang penginstalan TV secara keseluruhan. Info kontak - Menampilkan nomor telepon atau alamat web untuk negara atau wilayah Anda. Daftarkan TV Anda dan nikmati berbagai keuntungan termasuk dukungan penuh (termasuk unduhan), akses istimewa ke informasi produk baru, tawaran dan diskon eksklusif, kesempatan memenangkan hadiah, dan bahkan berpartisipasi dalam survei khusus tentang edisi baru. Buka Menggunakan Bantuan TV ini menyediakan bantuan di layar. Buka Bantuan 25.3 Tekan tombol (biru) untuk membuka langsung Bantuan. Bantuan akan terbuka pada bab ini yang paling relevan dengan apa yang sedang Anda lakukan atau apa yang dipilih di TV. Untuk mencari topik berdasarkan abjad, tekan tombol berwarna Kata Kunci. Penyelesaian Masalah Untuk membaca Bantuan dalam bentuk buku, pilih Buku. TV tidak aktif Lepaskan kabel daya dari stopkontak. Tunggu sekitar satu menit lalu sambungkan kembali. Pastikan kabel daya tersambung dengan benar. Mengaktifkan dan Menonaktifkan Remote Control Anda juga bisa membuka Bantuan di menu Awal atau menu TV. Suara berderik saat pengaktifan atau penonaktifan Sebelum menjalankan petunjuk Bantuan, tutup Bantuan. Untuk menutup Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Tutup. Saat Anda menyalakan, mematikan atau membuat TV siaga, Anda mendengar bunyi berderik dari sasis TV. Bunyi berderik disebabkan oleh ekspansi dan penyusutan TV yang normal saat TV mendingin atau menghangat. Ini tidak mempengaruhi kinerjanya. Untuk beberapa aktivitas, seperti Teks (Teleteks), tombol warna memiliki fungsi khusus dan tidak dapat membuka Bantuan. TV tidak merespons remote control TV memerlukan waktu agak lama untuk memulai. Dalam waktu ini, TV tidak merespons remote control atau kontrol TV. Ini perilaku normal. Jika TV tetap tidak merespons remote control, periksalah apakah remote control berfungsi dengan menggunakan kamera ponsel. Atur ponsel dalam mode kamera dan arahkan remote control ke lensa kamera. Jika Anda menekan tombol pada remote control dan melihat lampu LED inframerah berkedip melalui kamera, maka remote control berfungsi. TV perlu diperiksa. Jika tidak terlihat adanya kedipan, remote control mungkin rusak atau baterainya lemah. Metode pemeriksaan remote control ini tidak dapat Bantuan TV di tablet, smartphone atau komputer Untuk melakukan urutan petunjuk yang lebih rumit dengan lebih mudah, Anda dapat mengunduh Bantuan TV dalam format PDF untuk dibaca pada smartphone, tablet atau komputer Anda. Selain itu, Anda juga dapat mencetak halaman Bantuan yang sesuai dari komputer Anda. Untuk mengunduh Bantuan (buku petunjuk), buka (Menu TV) > Bantuan Anda dapat menggunakan fungsi Bantuan lain untuk 170

171 dilakukan pada remote control yang dipasangkan secara nirkabel dengan TV. Pastikan perangkat tersambung dengan benar. Pastikan pengaturan gambar diatur dengan benar. TV kembali ke siaga setelah menampilkan layar Pengaturan gambar berubah setelah beberapa saat pengaktifan Philips Pastikan bahwa Lokasi diatur ke HOME. Anda dapat mengganti dan menyimpan pengaturan dalam mode ini. Jika TV dalam keadaan siaga, layar pengaktifan Philips ditampilkan, lalu TV kembali ke mode siaga. Ini perilaku normal. Jika TV dilepas sambungannya dan disambungkan lagi ke catu daya, layar pengaktifan ditampilkan pada saat diaktifkan lagi. Untuk mengaktifkan TV dari siaga, tekan pada remote control atau TV. Banner komersial muncul Pastikan Lokasi diatur ke Awal. Gambar tidak pas dengan layar Lampu siaga terus berkedip Ubah menjadi format gambar yang berbeda. Lepaskan kabel daya dari stopkontak. Tunggu 5 menit sebelum Anda menyambungkan kabel daya kembali. Jika berkedip lagi, hubungi Dukungan Pelanggan TV Philips. Posisi gambar salah Sinyal gambar dari beberapa perangkat mungkin tidak pas di layar. Periksa output sinyal perangkat yang tersambung. Gambar komputer tidak stabil Saluran Pastikan PC Anda menggunakan resolusi dan kecepatan refresh yang didukung. Saluran digital tidak ditemukan selama penginstalan Lihat spesifikasi teknis untuk memastikan bahwa TV mendukung DVB-T atau DVB-C di negara Anda. Pastikan semua kabel tersambung dengan benar dan jaringan yang benar dipilih. Suara Tidak ada suara atau kualitas suara buruk Jika sinyal audio tidak terdeteksi, TV akan otomatis menonaktifkan output audio ini bukan kerusakan. Saluran yang diinstal sebelumnya tidak ada di dalam daftar saluran Pastikan pengaturan suara diatur dengan benar. Pastikan semua kabel tersambung dengan benar. Pastikan volume tidak didiamkan atau diatur ke nol. Pastikan output audio TV tersambung ke input audio di Sistem Home Theatre. Suara seharusnya terdengar dari speaker HTS. Beberapa perangkat mungkin memerlukan pengaktifan output audio HDMI secara manual. Jika audio HDMI telah diaktifkan, tetapi Anda masih belum bisa mendengar audionya, coba ubah format audio digital perangkat menjadi PCM (Pulse Code Modulation). Lihat dokumentasi yang menyertai perangkat Anda untuk petunjuknya. Pastikan daftar saluran yang benar dipilih. Gambar Tidak ada gambar/gambar terdistorsi Pastikan antena tersambung dengan benar ke TV. Pastikan perangkat lunak yang benar dipilih sebagai sumber tampilan. Pastikan perangkat atau sumber eksternal tersambung dengan benar. Ada suara tapi tidak ada gambar Pastikan pengaturan gambar diatur dengan benar. Penerimaan antena buruk Pastikan antena tersambung dengan benar ke TV. Pengeras suara, perangkat audio yang tidak ditanahkan, lampu neon, gedung tinggi dan bendabenda besar lainnya dapat memengaruhi kualitas penerimaan. Jika memungkinkan, cobalah untuk meningkatkan kualitas penerimaan dengan mengubah arah antena atau menjauhkan perangkat dari TV. Jika penerimaan di satu saluran saja yang buruk, sempurnakan saluran ini dengan Penginstalan Manual. HDMI dan USB HDMI Perhatikan bahwa dukungan HDCP (Perlindungan Konten Digital Bandwidth Tinggi) dapat menambah waktu yang diperlukan TV untuk menampilkan konten dari perangkat HDMI. Jika TV tidak mengenali perangkat HDMI dan tidak ada gambar yang ditampilkan, beralihlah dari satu perangkat ke perangkat lain dan kembali lagi. Jika gambar dan suara perangkat yang tersambung ke HDMI 3 atau HDMI 4 terdistorsi, sambungkan perangkat ke HDMI 1 atau HDMI 2 di TV ini. Gambar dari perangkat buruk 171

172 Jika gambar dan suara perangkat yang tersambung dengan HDMI terganggu, periksa apakah pengaturan HDMI Ultra HD lainnya bisa mengatasi masalah ini. Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari HDMI Ultra HD. Jika ada gangguan suara berselang, pastikan pengaturan output dari perangkat HDMI benar. Jika Anda menggunakan adaptor HDMI-ke-DVI atau kabel HDMI-ke-DVI, pastikan kabel audio tambahan tersambung ke AUDIO IN (jack mini saja), jika tersedia. Protocol) di router. DHCP harus diaktifkan. Sambungan Bluetooth hilang Posisikan speaker nirkabel dalam jarak 5 meter dari TV. Tempat-tempat dengan berbagai aktivitas nirkabel apartemen yang memiliki banyak router nirkabel dapat menghambat sambungan nirkabel. Pertahankan jarak router dan speaker nirkabel sedekat mungkin dengan TV. EasyLink HDMI tidak berfungsi Pastikan bahwa perangkat HDMI Anda kompatibel dengan HDMI-CEC. Fitur EasyLink hanya berfungsi dengan perangkat yang kompatibel dengan HDMICEC. Sinkronisasi Audio dan Video Bluetooth Sebelum membeli speaker Bluetooth nirkabel, cari tahu kualitas sinkronisasi Audio dengan Videonya, yang biasanya disebut 'lip sync'. Tidak semua perangkat Bluetooth memiliki kinerja bagus. Minta saran dari toko/penjual TV Anda. Ikon tidak ada volume ditampilkan Jika perangkat audio HDMI-CEC tersambung dan Anda menggunakan Remote Control TV untuk menyesuaikan tingkat volume perangkat, hal ini normal. Foto, video dan musik dari perangkat USB tidak Bahasa Menu Salah Bahasa menu salah ditampilkan Pastikan perangkat penyimpanan USB diatur agar sesuai dengan Kelas Penyimpanan Massal, seperti yang dijelaskan dalam dokumentasi perangkat penyimpanan. Pastikan perangkat penyimpanan USB kompatibel dengan TV. Pastikan format file audio dan gambar didukung oleh TV. Kembalikan bahasa ke bahasa Anda. Pemutaran file USB tersendat-sendat Kinerja transfer perangkat penyimpanan USB mungkin membatasi kecepatan transfer data ke TV yang menyebabkan pemutaran buruk Tekan (tombol bulat di atas tombol OK). 2 - Pilih ikon (Pengaturan) dan 3 - Tekan 5 kali (turun). 4 - Tekan 3 kali (kanan), pilih bahasa Anda dan 5 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Bantuan online Untuk menyelesaikan masalah terkait TV Philips, Anda dapat bertanya kepada dukungan online kami. Anda dapat memilih bahasa dan mengetikkan nomor model produk Anda. Wi-Fi, Internet dan Bluetooth Buka Jaringan Wi-Fi tidak ditemukan atau terganggu Oven microwave, telepon DECT, atau perangkat WiFi b/g/n lain di sekitar Anda mungkin mengganggu jaringan nirkabel. Pastikan firewall di jaringan Anda memungkinkan akses ke sambungan nirkabel TV. Jika jaringan nirkabel tidak bekerja dengan tepat di rumah Anda, coba penginstalan jaringan berkabel. Pada situs dukungan Anda dapat menemukan nomor telepon dukungan pelanggan di negara Anda serta jawaban atas pertanyaan yang sering diajukan (FAQ). Di beberapa negara, Anda dapat bercakap-cakap melalui Internet dengan salah satu kolaborator kami dan mengajukan pertanyaan langsung atau mengirim pertanyaan via . Anda dapat mengunduh perangkat lunak TV atau buku petunjuk untuk dibaca di komputer. Internet tidak berfungsi Jika sambungan ke router OK, periksa sambungan router ke Internet. PC dan sambungan Internet lambat Lihat informasi tentang jangkauan dalam ruangan, kecepatan transfer, dan faktor kualitas sinyal lainnya di buku petunjuk router nirkabel Anda. Gunakan sambungan Internet berkecepatan tinggi (broadband) untuk router Anda Dukungan dan Perbaikan Untuk masalah dukungan dan perbaikan, hubungi hotline Dukungan Pelanggan di negara Anda. Teknisi servis kami akan melakukan perbaikan, jika perlu. DHCP Jika sambungan gagal, Anda dapat memeriksa pengaturan DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Cari nomor telepon di dokumen cetak yang disertakan dengan TV Anda. 172

173 Atau kunjungi situs web kami dan pilih negara Anda jika diperlukan. Nomor model dan nomor seri TV Anda mungkin diminta untuk memberi nomor model produk TV dan nomor seri TV. Temukan nomor ini di label kemasan atau pada label jenis di bagian belakang atau bawah TV. Peringatan Jangan sekali-kali memperbaiki TV sendiri. Tindakan tersebut bisa menyebabkan cedera parah, kerusakan TV yang tidak dapat diperbaiki, atau membatalkan garansi. 173

174 menopang berat TV dan dudukan. Saat terpasang, pastikan braket pemasangan di dinding tersebut dapat dengan aman menopang berat TV. TP Vision tidak bertanggung jawab atas kesalahan pemasangan di dinding yang menyebabkan kecelakaan, cedera, atau kerusakan. Beberapa bagian dari produk ini terbuat dari kaca. Tangani dengan hati-hati untuk menghindari cedera atau kerusakan. 26 Keselamatan dan Perawatan 26.1 Keselamatan Risiko kerusakan pada TV! Sebelum menyambungkan TV ke stopkontak, pastikan voltase daya cocok dengan nilai voltase yang tertera di bagian belakang TV. Jangan sekali-kali menyambungkan TV ke stopkontak jika voltasenya berbeda. Penting Baca dan pahami semua petunjuk keselamatan sebelum menggunakan TV. Jika kerusakan tersebut diakibatkan ketidakpatuhan terhadap petunjuk, garansi akan hangus. Risiko Cedera pada Anak-Anak Risiko Tersengat Aliran Listrik atau Kebakaran Ikuti tindakan pencegahan ini agar TV tidak terguling dan menyebabkan cedera pada anak-anak: Jangan letakkan TV pada permukaan yang tertutup kain atau bahan yang dapat ditarik. Pastikan tidak ada bagian TV yang menggantung di tepi permukaan pemasangan. Jangan meletakkan TV pada perabot yang tinggi, seperti rak buku, tanpa menahan perabot dan TV ke dinding atau penopang yang sesuai. Beri tahu anak-anak tentang bahaya memanjat perabot untuk menjangkau TV. Hindarkan TV dari terkena hujan atau air. Jangan sekali-kali meletakkan wadah berisi zat cair, seperti vas, di dekat TV. Jika cairan tumpah di atas atau masuk ke dalam TV, segera lepaskan TV dari stopkontak. Hubungi Layanan Pelanggan TV Philips agar TV diperiksa sebelum digunakan. Jangan paparkan TV, remote control atau baterai pada panas berlebih. Jangan menempatkan barangbarang tersebut dekat lilin yang menyala, api terbuka atau sumber panas lain, termasuk sinar matahari langsung. Jangan masukkan benda ke slot ventilasi atau bagian-bagian terbuka lainnya pada TV. Jangan meletakkan benda-benda berat di atas kabel daya. Hindari mendorong keras steker daya secara paksa. Steker daya yang longgar bisa menimbulkan percikan api atau kebakaran. Pastikan tidak ada tekanan pada kabel daya saat Anda memutar layar TV. Untuk memutus sambungan TV dari daya listrik utama, steker daya TV harus dilepaskan. Saat memutus sambungan daya, selalu tarik stekernya, jangan kabelnya. Pastikan Anda selalu memiliki akses sepenuhnya terhadap steker, kabel, dan stopkontak. Risiko menelan baterai! Remote control mungkin menggunakan baterai jeniskoin yang bisa dengan mudah tertelan oleh anak kecil. Selalu jauhkan baterai dari jangkauan anakanak. Risiko Panas Berlebih Jangan sekali-kali memasang TV di ruang yang sempit. Selalu berikan jarak sekitar 10 cm atau 4 inci di sekitar TV untuk ventilasi. Pastikan tirai atau objek lain tidak menutup slot ventilasi pada TV. Badai Petir Lepas TV dari stopkontak dan antena sebelum terjadi badai petir. Selama badai petir, jangan menyentuh bagian apa pun dari TV, kabel daya atau kabel antena. Risiko Cedera atau Kerusakan pada TV Perlu dua orang untuk mengangkat dan membawa TV yang beratnya lebih dari 25 kg atau 55 lbs. Jika Anda memasang TV pada dudukan, gunakan dudukan yang disertakan saja. Kencangkan dudukan TV dengan kuat. Letakkan TV di permukaan datar dan rata yang dapat 174

175 Risiko Kerusakan Pendengaran Jangan menggunakan earphone atau headphone pada volume tinggi atau dalam jangka waktu lama. Suhu Rendah Jika TV diangkut dalam suhu di bawah 5 C atau 41 F, bongkar TV dan tunggu hingga suhu TV mencapai suhu kamar sebelum menyambungkan TV ke stopkontak. Kelembapan Bergantung pada suhu dan kelembapan, Anda mungkin mendapati sedikit kondensasi di bagian dalam kaca depan TV Anda (di beberapa model), namun kasus ini sangat jarang terjadi. Untuk mencegahnya, hindarkan TV dari sinar matahari langsung, panas, atau kelembapan ekstrem. Jika terjadi, kondensasi tersebut akan langsung lenyap saat TV diputar selama beberapa jam. Uap kondensasi tidak akan membahayakan TV atau menyebabkan malfungsi Perawatan Layar Jangan menyentuh, menekan, menggosok atau membentur layar dengan benda apa pun. Cabut kabel daya TV sebelum membersihkan. Bersihkan TV dan bingkai dengan kain lembap yang lembut dan seka perlahan. Jangan menyentuh LED Ambilight yang terdapat di bagian belakang TV. Jangan gunakan zat-zat seperti alkohol, zat kimiawi atau pembersih rumah tangga pada TV. Agar bentuknya tidak berubah dan warnanya tidak memudar, seka tetesan air sesegera mungkin. Hindari gambar diam semaksimal mungkin. Gambar diam adalah gambar yang tetap ditampilkan di layar dalam jangka waktu lama. Gambar diam termasuk menu di layar, bilah hitam, tampilan waktu, dll. Jika Anda harus menggunakan gambar diam, kurangi kontras dan kecerahan layar untuk mencegah kerusakan pada layar. 175

176 direkomendasikan atau diotorisasikan di buku petunjuk ini akan membatalkan garansi. 27 Ketentuan Penggunaan Karakteristik piksel Produk TV ini memiliki piksel berwarna dalam jumlah banyak. Meskipun jumlah piksel efektifnya 99,999% atau lebih, titik hitam atau titik terang cahaya (merah, hijau, atau biru) mungkin muncul secara konstan pada layar. Itu merupakan karakteristik struktur dari layar (dalam Standar industri umum) dan bukan merupakan kerusakan Ketentuan Penggunaan - TV 2018 TP Vision Europe B.V. Semua hak dilindungi undang-undang. Kepatuhan CE Dengan ini, TP Vision Europe B.V. menyatakan bahwa televisi ini mematuhi ketentuan penting dan peraturan relevan lainnya yang diberlakukan Directive berikut 1999/5/EC RTTE), 2004/108/EC (EMC), 2006/95/ EC (Tegangan Rendah), 2009/125/EC (Pelabelan Energi), dan 2011/65/EC (RoHS). Mulai Juni 2016 akan diberlakukan Directive berikut: 2014/53/EU (RED), 2009/125/EC (Desain Ramah Lingkungan), 2010/30/EU (Pelabelan Energi), dan 2011/65/EC (RoHS). Produk ini dipasarkan oleh TP Vision Europe B.V. atau salah satu afiliasinya, yang selanjutnya dalam dokumen ini disebut TP Vision, yang merupakan produsen produk ini. TP Vision adalah pemberi garansi terkait TV ini yang di dalamnya disertai buklet ini. Philips dan Philips Shield Emblem adalah merek dagang terdaftar dari Koninklijke Philips N.V. Spesifikasi bisa berubah tanpa pemberitahuan. Merek dagang adalah hak milik Koninklijke Philips N.V atau pemiliknya masing-masing. TP Vision berhak mengubah produk kapan pun tanpa berkewajiban untuk menyesuaikan suplai sebelumnya. Kepatuhan terhadap EMF TP Vision memproduksi dan menjual banyak produk yang ditargetkan bagi konsumen, seperti perkakas elektronik lainnya, yang secara umum memiliki kemampuan untuk memancarkan dan menerima sinyal elektromagnetik. Salah satu prinsip bisnis TP Vision yang terkemuka adalah melakukan semua upaya kesehatan dan keselamatan yang diperlukan untuk produk kami, guna mematuhi semua ketentuan hukum yang berlaku dan tetap mengikuti standar Medan Elektro Magnetik (EMF) yang berlaku pada saat memproduksi produk tersebut. Materi tertulis yang dikemas bersama TV dan buku petunjuk yang tersimpan di dalam memori TV atau diunduh dari situs web Philips diyakini cukup untuk penggunaan sistem sesuai peruntukannya. Materi di panduan ini diyakini cukup untuk membantu penggunaan sistem sesuai peruntukannya. Jika produk, atau masing-masing modul atau prosedurnya digunakan untuk tujuan selain yang ditetapkan di sini, pastikan kevalidan dan kesesuaiannya. TP Vision menjamin bahwa materinya tidak melanggar satu pun paten Amerika Serikat. Tidak ada jaminan lain yang tersurat maupun tersirat. TP Vision tidak dapat dimintai pertanggungjawabannya atas kesalahan isi di dalam dokumen ini atau masalah akibat konten dalam dokumen ini. Kesalahan yang dilaporkan kepada Philips akan disesuaikan dan dipublikasikan di situs web dukungan Philips sesegera mungkin. TP Vision berkomitmen untuk mengembangkan, memproduksi, dan memasarkan produk yang tidak menyebabkan efek buruk terhadap kesehatan. TP Vision menyatakan bahwa selama produk ditangani dengan benar sesuai peruntukannya, produk aman untuk digunakan sesuai bukti ilmiah yang tersedia saat ini. TP Vision berperan aktif dalam pengembangan standar EMF dan keselamatan internasional, sehingga TP Vision dapat mengantisipasi perkembangan lebih lanjut dalam standardisasi ini untuk menyertakannya dalam produknya sedari awal. Ketentuan jaminan - Risiko cedera, kerusakan pada TV, atau pembatalan garansi! Jangan sekali-sekali memperbaiki sendiri TV Anda. Gunakan TV dan aksesori hanya sesuai peruntukannya oleh produsen. Tanda perhatian yang tertera pada bagian belakang TV menunjukkan risiko sengatan listrik. Jangan sekali-kali melepaskan penutup TV. Selalu hubungi Layanan Pelanggan TV Philips untuk melakukan servis atau perbaikan. Cari nomor telepon di dokumen cetak yang disertakan dengan TV Anda. Atau kunjungi situs web kami dan pilih negara Anda jika diperlukan. Semua operasi yang secara tegas dilarang di buku petunjuk ini, atau semua penyetelan dan prosedur perakitan yang tidak 27.2 Ketentuan Penggunaan Smart TV Anda dapat melihat ketentuan penggunaan, kebijakan privasi, dan juga menetapkan pengaturan privasi untuk Smart TV Anda. Untuk membuka halaman ketentuan penggunaan Smart TV 176

177 1 - Tekan HOME untuk membuka menu Awal. 2 - Pilih App untuk membuka Aplikasi Ketentuan Penggunaan Galeri Aplikasi Philips Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Ketentuan Penggunaan, Galeri Aplikasi untuk informasi selengkapnya. 177

178 Hak Cipta Dolby Audio 28.1 Diproduksi berdasarkan lisensi dari Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, dan simbol D ganda merupakan merek dagang dari Dolby MHL Laboratories. MHL MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link dan Logo MHL adalah merek dagang atau merek dagang terdaftar dari MHL, LLC DTS Premium Sound DTS Premium Sound Untuk paten DTS, lihat Diproduksi berdasarkan lisensi dari DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, Simbolnya, & DTS serta Simbolnya secara bersamaan merupakan merek dagang terdaftar, dan DTS Premium Sound merupakan merek dagang dari DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. Hak Cipta Dilindungi Undang-undang Ultra HD Ultra HD Logo DIGITALEUROPE UHD Display adalah merek dagang dari DIGITALEUROPE HDMI DTS 2.0+Digital Out HDMI DTS 2.0+Digital Out Istilah HDMI dan Antarmuka Multimedia DefinisiTinggi HDMI, serta Logo HDMI merupakan merek dagang atau merek dagang terdaftar dari HDMI Licensing LLC di Amerika Serikat dan negara-negara lainnya. Untuk paten DTS, lihat Diproduksi berdasarkan lisensi dari DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, Simbolnya, & DTS serta Simbolnya secara bersamaan merupakan merek dagang terdaftar, dan DTS 2.0+Digital Out merupakan merek dagang dari DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. Hak Cipta Dilindungi Undang-undang. 178